Home

Fuze Edit Tool User Guide (Version 3.7)

1. 4 4 copying clips s cnctcsces 4 18 4 20 creating a folder 4 8 4 15 deleting a clip ee 4 21 deleting a folder 0 008 4 16 EXPONE ti iienaa eee eee ert 8 15 folder area n 3 3 4 3 4 14 IMPONE statin teat due seta cesdeecersctatece 8 14 inpoint setting n n 3 6 4 20 load dace tatoo cccaeteretorsneeeenmetie 8 14 l 2 MENN aeoe eee 8 15 pasting clips esssssssssnnnnennnnneenne 4 18 renaming a folder ee 4 15 selecting clips Sesdetsaxintatereiasaiats 4 18 sorting clips into folders 4 19 sorting of clips n e 4 19 sorting of columns n s 4 5 sorting of folders s ni 4 15 text only ccenn 4 5 thumbnail o ae 3 5 4 10 thumbnail with text c 4 6 title bar sssriiei senais 4 3 4 4 4 15 view buttons scce 4 4 4 5 pin clip orein o A 1 see also bin create finalizing scsss scsceseesscecs 6 70 inpoint setting o n 3 6 4 20 pit depth sonein 3 6 NE e Ho A 6 76 ACO c O M 6 72 black frames sect 2ceuieer sitet siewesieetectes 6 70 broadcast signal legal 5 4 broadcast standard aace 5 3 Broadcast Wave eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 button ee ee rene 7 30 Ae gcse 2eio li eacanct sea easaiaeieese 6 15 7 30 He o i E 3 12 6 39 Mark seriotan 6 48 SD CUT eprsiniii herrian 6 18 Add cionis anias 6 19 7 27 audio routing esdexinstceecedacteciess 6 13 CENTE oi ecct cece svciecucecieese 6 23 Clear ae et ee en 4 40 COWIE sissies eeshesecsaeeacatncete 2 7 POPS ceri
2. To switch to another application Alt TAB To minimize the user interface for example to access other ap plications you may also use the Minimize menu option of the program icon on the menu bar see section Minimize on page 8 2 Via the check box Don t show this message again offered by information messages of the DVS software you can deacti vate the appearance of this particular message for the current software session i e next session it will be displayed again When starting the DVS software a drop report is as a standard automatically written Further information about the log files and the drop reports can be found in section The Performance Monitor on page 4 32 PVs Getting Started 3 2 First Steps in the Edit Tool This section introduces in a step by step description how to work with the Edit Tool It will be explained what to do to begin a project how to work with the timeline and how to perform some basic editing tasks Use this tutorial to familiarize yourself with the Edit Tool and the way it has to be handled 3 2 1 Preparing the Bin After starting the DVS software the Edit Tool will be started automati cally At the upper left side of the program window you can see the tool area with the bin activated by default Bin Effects Jobs Markers Perform title bar e Jold ers a folder area e contents area e button area gt Fig
3. 6 22 The Output information at the top provides you with details about the currently set video format and its aspect ratio Directly below it you can find the Aspect ratio combo box where you can either select one of the predefined aspect ratios from the provided list or simply enter the desired ratio in the field of the combo box directly You can enter the aspect ratio in any format you like either by typing in a floating point number or its original division formula The cropping will be applied to the video output representation the video overlay as well as to the vid eo output directly as soon as a predefined aspect ratio is selected or a typed in value is confirmed by pressing the Enter key Notation Floating point or division x y Examples 1 77777778 16 9 With the Hold aspect ratio check box you can lock the aspect ratio selected with the combo box above Then when changes are applied manually to the cropping e g via the entry fields or the sliders the chosen aspect ratio will be maintained In the middle of the window you can find a representation of your cur rent video output With the items provided by and positioned around the image you can change the cropping manually Figure 6 22 Manual controls of cropping To change the cropping manually use for example the entry fields and type in the desired values in pixels The cropping will be applied to the representation as well as to your video output as s
4. Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs By pressing the left mouse button and mov ing the mouse you can rotate the color cube By clicking with the scroll wheel or the right mouse button you can switch the output colors to the input colors and vice versa The one currently displayed will be indicated at the top of the preview area By turning the scroll wheel of the mouse you can morph the colors in the cube from output to input and vice versa The degree of the morphing will be indicated at the top of the preview area Once at least one profile is available in the list box you can enable it for the Edit Tool For this the desired profile name has to be selected from the list box and your selection has to be confirmed with the OK button The button CANCEL it will close the window for the 3D LUT manage ment without confirming any of the alterations Nevertheless the selected 3D LUT profile and file will be in effect for the timeline only if the check box Video 3D LUT is activated which is available in the Options area of the Timeline output settings win dow Video 3B LUT x 3D LUT Figure 6 18 Activation of the 3D LUT profile Then the selected profile and its 3D LUT file will be applied to the ma terial in the timeline of the Edit Tool 6 2 9 Cropping the Timeline 6 20 Via the SETTINGS button you can crop the contents EE of the timeline for example if you need black bars in the video output lette
5. To change in and outpoints of timeline elements such as a video clip already added to the timeline perform the following e Select from the clip s representation its in or outpoint handler and move it to the right or to the left to extend or reduce the clip s length in the timeline You cannot change in and outpoints beyond the limits of the original material on the storage 6 43 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 44 e _ _ handler Figure 6 39 Changing of in or outpoint This will change the in or outpoint of the clip accordingly This procedure can be used for all timeline elements i e video clips au dio clips and embedded operators e g transitions To adjust their length in the timeline simply select their in outpoint handler and move it to the right or left of the timeline The following figure shows for ex ample how to change the length of a transition g 06 118 01 00 t aples_Ufo_Ni Hollywood Figure 6 40 Changing the length of a transition The length of a timeline element i e its outpoint can also be adjusted frame accurately with its timeline element properties see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 As long as the insert mode of the Edit Tool is active the subse quent clips and embedded operators will automatically adjust their positions on the timeline respectively When the Edit Tool is set
6. Tracks can also be added and removed via the context menu of i a clip timeline track see section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 55 and section The Context Menu of Audio Clips on page 6 63 Working with several video tracks vertically in the timeline is different from the usual approach of a horizontal editing in a timeline Then the different tracks of the timeline form a stack Further information about this and how to work with vertical editing can be found in section Vertical Editing of Video Clips in the Timeline on page 6 59 Further information about the Timeline output settings window can be found in section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 11 PVs The Timeline Changing Track Sizes Manually The track sizes can also be manually set in the timeline area Setting the tracks to individual sizes may be useful in case you want to focus on im portant tracks or display an audio track with an audio waveform more clearly see section Waveform Display on page 6 66 The video and audio tracks can be adjusted to an individual height For this you have to move the bottom line of a track separation line in the area right in front of the tracks with the mouse 00 00 ALARGA Teaser Li Vv wan Holliwood Figure 6 5 Setting track sizes manually The thumbnails or audio clip features will be scaled accordingly 6 2 2 Changing the Appearance of Video Clip
7. Folders may also be created automatically if an audio clip is registered as a multi clip For more information about multi clips see section Details about Clips on page 4 10 The respective data will then be made available to the DVS software and you will see it in the contents area of the bin By repeating the de scribed steps above you can add as many clips to the bin as you need Once clips are available in the bin you can start working with the Edit Tool and add them to the timeline see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 Adding Clips to the Bin Using the Add Clip Menu Options You can use the add clip menu options to select video or audio clips that you want available in the bin For a list of the supported file formats see section Supported J File Formats on page A 9 e Either select the Add clip menu option on the context menu of the bin s contents area or the menu option Add clip on the menu Project section The Project Menu on page 8 3 Both possibilities open a standard dialog window of the operating sys tem for the selection of a file The Tool Area Add Clip Look in 00014 00015 00016 File name Files of type All files C Figure 4 8 Dialog window to add a clip to the bin e Select a video or audio file from the list box or enter its name in the entry field File name video directory the scrub bar cursor of the thumbnail
8. If a non destructive export is selected for the external applications the source material of the clip will be copied to the same path and location The Timeline where the original material is stored with an incrementing number add ed to the directory name of the clip lt name of clip s directo ry gt lt incrementing numbers After this the copied source material will be opened in the external application where you can pro cess it In the meantime the clip s representation in the timeline of the Edit Tool will be changed to the location of the copied material i e a new bin clip will be added to the bin of the Edit Tool and the represen tation of the clip in the video track of the timeline will be changed to this new bin clip and location As soon as you have processed the ma terial with the other application and saved it you can use it immediately in the software without having overwritten the original source its bin clip is still present in the bin When a destructive export is selected for the external applications no changes will be applied to the clip s representations in the Edit Tool The source material is sent directly to the external application where it can be processed Once the changes are saved the material can be imme diately accessed with the DVS software However due to the destruc tive export your original source material on the storage will be lost 6 5 5 Vertical Editing of Video Clips in the Timeli
9. Sf 2 Mie gt Example V tempest ed1 tempest_edl Setting up the Timeline for the EDL Use the area Export to set up the timeline of the Edit Tool i e the tracks as well as the timeline s range for the creation of the EDL It pro vides the settings items as described below Audio This check box determines that audio should be part of the data list i e the contents of the audio tracks of the Edit Tool will be added to the created file Video This check box determines that video should be part of the data list i e the contents of a video track of the Edit Tool will be added to the created file Only one video track and if not muted the first video track will be exported Replace gaps __ If this check box is enabled gaps present in the with black clips timeline will be handled as black clips in the EDL Range With this combo box you have to set whether the data list should include the complete timeline A11 or the part between a set in and outpoint of the timeline only In Out By muting tracks you can determine the contents of the time i line that should be used during the creation of the data list fur ther see section Muting and Locking Tracks on page 6 32 The Menus Configuration of the EDL Timecode Because a data list contains for the most part detailed timecode infor mation the area Timecode of the window to export an EDL provides you with item
10. Then the area will look similar to the following figure Markers Perform title bar e iFR folder area e contents area e button area e Figure 4 4 The bin With the bin you can perform a clip and project management by creat ing folders and sorting your video and audio material into them Fur thermore you can preview your material via thumbnails and select a preliminary inpoint for the respective clip For this the bin provides the following elements Most areas or items of the bin provide a context menu to make the various functions of the bin available to the user title bar With the title bar you can change the layout of the bin or sort your created folders present in the folder area folder area In the folder area you can create folders to sort and structure your video and audio material This way you can perform a clip and project management 4 3 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs contents area In the contents area you can see the video or audio material already added to the bin and sorted into the folders via their thumbnails or text information If the thumbnail view is activated a scrub bar to preview your material in still images and to set roughly the inpoint of the respective clip is provid ed by a clip once it is selected You can administer the clips directly or add new clips to the bin with the help of the context menu of the contents area butt
11. on page 4 18 Relink clip Once a clip is available in the timeline it can be relinked i e referenced to other source material manually from the timeline directly For further in formation about this see section Relinking Clips on page 6 53 Bin Clip properties With this menu option you can open from a clip in the timeline the properties of its source clip in the bin see section Changing the Properties of Clips on page 4 21 PVs The Timeline Show alpha This menu option displays the alpha channel key channel only of a video clip in the video overlay as well as at the outputs of the DVS system For further informa tion see section Displaying the Alpha Channel on page 6 61 Add track Increases the amount of video tracks that will be visible in the timeline area by one see also section Video and Audio Track Properties on page 6 6 Remove track Decreases the amount of video tracks that will be visible in the timeline area by one see also section Video and Audio Track Properties on page 6 6 6 5 3 Consistencies of Clips During the loading of a project file or the import of a bin see section Open on page 8 4 and section Import Bin on page 8 14 video clips are checked for inconsistencies It is tested whether the first and the last frame of each video clip is available on the storage How ever frames missing inbetween th
12. 6 63 properties 5 soca 3 6 4 21 6 64 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide properties of multi clip 4 12 4 21 thumbnail es tectenrsssecetheactcsaasenes 4 11 VOIWIMNG satioseicicceiescceiceditateee eas 6 65 volume control line 20 6 65 volume control point 6 65 waveform display 20 6 66 audio Options tvcianaccutes setenteelodiecss 6 16 Audio Scrubbing eeeceeeeeeees 6 17 audio track 3 8 6 2 6 4 6 62 Ca o ne eee eee ere re eres 6 64 DUTON aeeai 3 10 6 32 Hiden e eee 6 5 OCK Seset eier a 6 32 M LE ecic cs paticedeedeveranarteeses 6 32 NAME od ocee chee eaeeescee eres 6 24 NUMBEF seccsicetececectecceeacest 6 6 6 64 properties n n 6 13 FEIMOVE sosro orisi i 6 64 POUNG acceca 6 13 TA E E 6 6 size manual setting c e 6 7 autosave escccceen 2 4 8 3 8 18 autoscaling a an 3 10 6 12 6 75 Avid Log Exchange ccecce A 1 clipwise rendering 6 71 B background jobs 2 su2ssctesdessiededancs 4 29 DAG RUD iecazacisquerSleteevieet i nate ie 8 3 backup file neee 8 6 base video directory 4 14 8 16 DiN ces cn casts eucetaeancvercected 3 3 4 3 A 1 add clip actensi nemesis 3 4 4 6 8 5 change layout nccc 4 4 check for inconsistencies 8 4 8 14 8 15 Clea ceiros 8 15 configuration eee 3 4 4 4 contents area 3 3 4 4 4 16 context menu contents area 4 17 context menu folder area 4 14 context menu title bar
13. Measuring the Performance Once the performance monitor and the software are prepared as de scribed in section Preparing the Software and the Performance Mon itor on page 4 40 you can begin the assessment of the workload e Start the play out operation of the material added to the timeline with the play button available in the control area of the Edit Tool see section Controls on page 5 11 This will start the play out of the video material added to the timeline and as soon as the play out starts the performance monitor will start its monitoring of the performance as well Bin Effects Jobs Markers Perform Update CT a DYSInfo Reset Switched view to Show overall file IO WORKLOAD Date Time Type Timeline TC Frame AC MarnkAll Clear Figure 4 27 Healthy performance Because the DVS system is capable of handling even high resolution material in real time you usually will not encounter any problem The performance bars will always appear in blue and no drops should occur The DVS software is able to process several different image files simul taneously multi threaded I O mode and one bar shown in the chart may represent several file accesses Thus the bars may well reach the 100 line during an operation which does not pose a problem to the real time operation It simply shows that all threads of the software are currently processing and no thread is idle The Tool Area If drops occur they will be
14. Once dragged to the effects pane the preset effect can be named to your liking easily see section Administration of Preset Effects on page 4 26 and or used immediately for other clips in the timeline see section Using Preset Effects on page 4 25 Creating Preset Effects via the Keyboard Preset effects can also be created via the keyboard Then they can be used as keyboard shortcuts to apply the respective preset effect For this perform the following e Select the adjusted effect from the effects list of the timeline ele ment properties e Then press the key combination Shift F lt n gt with lt n gt as the number of the function key on your keyboard that you want to assign the preset effect to i e keys F1 to F12 This will create a subeffect under the respective effects operator in the effects pane It will carry in its name the function key written in square brackets as the last element By performing the above said repeatedly you can create as many preset effects for this effects operator as there are function keys available The Tool Area Once available in the effects pane the name of the preset effect can be changed see section Administration of Preset Effects on page 4 26 and or it can be applied immediately to other clips in the timeline see section Using Preset Effects on page 4 25 erator alone meaning you can assign the same function key s to different effects operat
15. Timeline Element Properties If more than one LUT file is loaded the button SAVE will combine their color correction settings and create a new LUT file from the already set ones Afterwards you can use this single LUT file instead of several ones to color correct video clips More detailed information about 1D LUT files can be found in section 1D LUT Files on page A 14 7 31 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide 7 32 The Menus At the top of the Edit Tool software module you can see a menu bar menu bar e F 10 Out HD 1920 x 1080 29 971 YUV 4 2 2 10 Bit Figure 8 1 Menu bar of DVS software This menu bar provides access to functions and tasks of an administra tive nature for the Edit Tool Here you can find for example import and export functions as well as several menu options generally concerned with projects and project files This chapter describes the menu bar of the user interface All menus and menu options will be explained Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 1 The Menu of the Program Icon The program icon on the menu bar of the user interface provides menu options to control the user interface of the DVS software in general Here you can find the following menu options Figure 8 2 The menu of the program icon They are described in the following sections 8 1 1 Minimize To reduce the DVS software to a button on the taskbar of the Windows operati
16. After adding a clip to the timeline a gap may appear part of i the timeline without contents Gaps can be indicated by a red line in the timeline scale If this occurs you can move the clip easily to the beginning of the timeline with a double click of the mouse on the timeline scale see section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 34 e Now add the second clip of the bin to the timeline clip B If clip B is dropped in the middle of clip A in the video track clip A will be divided and the rest of it will move to the end of the timeline This behavior can be changed via the button INSERT This but i ton switches between the insert and the overwrite mode of the Edit Tool In the overwrite mode the rest of the clip or at least the contents of clip A with the length of clip B would be over written For the rest of this tutorial we suppose that this has happened and that clip A is divided into two by inserting clip B in the middle of it the timeline area If the audio clips incorporate more than one mono or stereo channel the additional channels will be added to the other audio tracks below the selected one i Audio clips can be dragged from the bin to the audio tracks of 3 2 3 Changing the View of the Timeline Via the sliders below the audio tracks in the timeline area you can change the view of the tracks Co ren Figure 3 5 Timeline sliders 3 8 Getting Started With
17. Dvs Appendix A 6 Slave Mode RS 422 Control For slave mode the DVS system supports the RS 422 9 pin control pro tocol as well as a subset major commands of the Odetics protocol When acting as a master the DVS system uses the RS 422 9 pin control protocol In case you want to control the DVS system in slave mode via RS 422 the following specifications have to be set on the master device to en sure frame accurate editing preroll gt 1 sec edit lag edit delay 7 frames postroll 1 sec Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 7 System Maintenance This section contains topics related to system maintenance work Carry out the described tasks whenever necessary A 7 1 The Automatic Defragmentation Process A 20 The DVS system provides an automatic defragmentation process for the connected storage that defragments previously copied or recorded data on the hard disk array so that they are more suited for real time operations The automatic defragmentation process is supplemented by i the defragmenter included in Spycer which can be used for ex ample for a selective defragmentation of single clips Further information about this can be found in the Spycer user guide Starting the Process The automatic defragmentation process is automatically started to gether with the DVS software It is then running in the background of the system and will operate during stand sti
18. aligned to other elements in the timeline via the snapping mode of the Edit Tool to ensure it provides the correct length in the timeline in and outpoint remain constant while the speed is changed z7 Clips can be set back to a speed of one 1 easily by setting the i speed factor back to one 1 However depending on the time stretching factor s used rounding errors may occur meaning for frame accurate length you may have to trim the outpoint of the clip 6 4 14 Relinking Clips Clips of either video or audio can be relinked in the timeline i e they can be referenced to other source material manually from the timeline directly To do this perform the following e Select the clip whose source material should be changed in the timeline e Then select from the context menu of this clip the menu option Relink clip see section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 55 and section The Context Menu of Audio Clips on page 6 63 This will open the standard dialog window of the DVS software for the selection of a file e Select the new source in this dialog window Once confirmed with the button OPEN the clip selected as the new source will be referenced to the clip s representation in the timeline and a new bin clip will be added to the root folder of the bin Afterwards in case of a video clip you will see the new video material in the video overlay once the timeline cursor is positioned on this clip
19. during record ssccsccccceee 4 44 location ccecce 4 38 PEHOE Seiiceeeges 3 2 4 33 4 39 reset COUnter ccecce 4 37 troubleshooting ccecce 4 43 drop table ccce 4 33 4 38 drop frame timecode 2 14 6 74 dropped frames audio see drop duration PVs Clip innana 6 55 6 63 7 3 entry field 0 6 29 timeline ocene 2 8 6 2 timeline element n on 7 3 transition ecce 3 14 7 3 DVI output settings nis sccsiacscunienccens 6 11 DVS CineReel cccccceeeeeeeeeee ees 8 6 DVS information file 3 15 4 33 4 37 E Edit TOO sororia 2 3 2 7 editing ccce 4 22 7 10 By AHO sissiiinaiieirinssiis 6 37 EDU chescucssvedeseectedhisgaysgevpchdeemaeceea ts A 2 COMMENTS genczaciedsepcerudecerdccadar 8 9 eate sicnt sinen 8 7 CRON A E eet 8 7 format ccecce 8 7 8 10 start EXpOrt oenccscecssdsanetava aves 8 10 TIME COGS Airra tirane 8 9 transitions sessen 8 10 e E cea es 4 22 see also preset effect Apply cccisasntcaintzececastutents 4 22 7 10 delete from clip 7 13 7 14 disable secorir erisa 7 13 effects list esseere 7 10 enable 2hedeiieenwscsnitebdieanceds 7 13 fade in out cce 7 21 IMPOTU cca tessa Gh ecnecepacetinaceiaees 4 28 SEGUENTE vreina iinei 7 13 settings o on 4 23 7 12 7 14 SOPE E E arrears 4 28 title bar ac henchsssactetetheesaiesenceetes 4 28 ffects list eco as 7 10 embedded audio 6 12 6 16 embedded operator sccccccccssrcnsnncseas A 2 enabling SD LUT dro
20. rivatives autosave or backup files see section Save on page 8 5 iJ Preset effects can be loaded from various sources You can use To load preset effects perform the following e Call up the context menu on an entry in the effects pane and select the menu option Load all presets This will open the standard dialog window for the selection of a file e In the dialog window select the file that contains the desired set tings from the list box or enter its name in the respective entry field File extensions xml Effects file cp Project file cp autosave Automatically saved intermedi ate situation backup cp Backup file of old project file e Once the appropriate file is selected confirm your choice with the button OPEN The preset effects available in the file will now be added to the effects pane In case the effects pane already contains preset effects they are not deleted but will remain there while the new preset effects will be added Sorting Default and Preset Effects The default effects as well as preset effects can be sorted You can sort them in descending or ascending order If your project contains a lot of preset effects this may make it easier for you to find an individual ef fect To sort the effects do the following e Simply click on the title bar Available Operators above the effects pane with the mouse This switches between a descending and ascending order of the effects tree as well
21. third party software ccccceeeeeseeees 1 7 delete clip a aceeacceecavers anes 6 55 6 63 thumbnail scsszsteacdaleatedendaonites 3 5 4 10 delete volume control point 6 63 at start and end only 6 7 6 8 duration s es 2 8 6 2 audio clip n se 4 11 enable 3D LUT file crecccseresepzanz 6 20 CON NUOUS sxcnaccecaceaccazcnezcs 6 7 6 8 enable cropping sses 6 23 file names instead of a s 6 8 forward backward play mode 5 15 in video track cccccccaccceceececcecccece 6 7 DIO T 6 35 invalid clip ccc h aeatet ovcstesswerszets 4 11 in outpoint 6 28 6 29 6 43 multi clip seses 4 11 INCONSISTENCIES riiin 6 57 no thumbnail 00 6 7 6 8 indicator line n 6 42 pending clip sssssssesiesecceeeeeeee 4 12 length indicator sec 6 2 scrub bar cesteeen ht eovcctettess 3 6 4 20 Lole cate Oe caiae incetnseceene tented 6 33 text only sisanissecssscsdmddnasiecaddiacs 4 5 loop mode nonsese 5 12 5 15 timeline markers ossi 4 31 maintain length 6 46 UNKNOWN seidesscreatcssecaemconideade 4 12 move within scatatetheantoesdnicecamete 6 25 video clip snnascpchetetsiedeciaseiangese 4 10 MUTE ossei iea E 6 33 With text ccccccceecceceeeeeeceeeeeess 4 6 OW E E 8 3 yellow marking s cc cccdecbcwesasscee 4 13 Offset arrite 6 8 time compression n 6 51 6 56 paste Clips s icerebriniroirireissasiisis 6 37 time stretching ccccccccce 6 51 6 56 play ase Stee ee ei 5 12 time stretching mode 5
22. this is confirmed with the OK button the settings of the preset effect will be applied to the selected effects operator This menu option creates a preset effect of the ef fect where the context menu was invoked After its activation a dialog window opens where you have to enter a name for the preset effect Once this is confirmed with the OK button the preset effect will be created as a subeffect under the respective effect in the tool area s effects pane Then it can be used easily to apply the same effect setting over and over again for different clips in the timeline for example with the Load Preset menu option see above Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 7 The Operator Zoom Pan The operator Zoom Pan allows to zoom pan and rotate as well as to sharpen or blur the contents of the video clip in the timeline It is by default available and active for all clips in the timeline and thus the first operator visible in the timeline element properties area after it has been accessed For this effect keyframing is available see section Keyfra ming on page 7 21 Effects Zoom amp Pan Rotation x Zoom Pan Width Height LI Lock xj LI Filter Adaptive Filter real time Aperture Rotation __ Keyframing Figure 7 10 Zoom and pan operator This section describes in detail the settings that this operator provides 7 7 1 Items for Zooming With the sliders for width and heig
23. 11 you can configure the analog audio outputs see section Further Audio Configurations on page 6 16 and the maximum amount of audio channels that will be embedded in the video signal 6 2 7 Further Audio Configurations Via the SETTINGS button you can configure the an EES alog audio outputs to monitor audio during your work with the software It is located at the top left side of the timeline area After pressing this button the Timeline output settings window is displayed At the bottom of this window you can find the Options area where further optional settings are provided To the right you can find the set tings items for a further configuration of audio The other items available in the Options area are explained in i their respective sections for an overview see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 11 Audio Serubbing x Monitoring Figure 6 14 Items for a further configuration of audio Dvs The Timeline In detail this area provides the following items Audio If this check box is activated the contents of the Scrubbing audio tracks will be given out during a scrubbing of the Edit Tool s timeline for example when making a fast shuttle operation with the mouse Then the audio signal resembles and imitates a fast shuttle operation of a VTR MONITORING The button MONITORING configures the analog audio outputs of the DVS system A click on this button
24. 3 VOVEISC oo occ ccccccccccccccccccceccucenneees 7 9 activation s s 5 3 SHARES assieto iuei nina 7 8 configuration sssesseeeeereeeesens 5 5 SOFTNESS naniii 7 9 deactivation ccce 5 5 layout configuration 5 4 y RGB parade c cocscaetieerscteietetides 5 6 vectorscope 100 nsss 5 5 yuy parade oisinn erei 5 7 vectorscope 75 cc2ccttaexicinatinices 5 5 waveform 2 2 2ccecceneseereeeeceeeees 5 7 YUV parade sssivieiisinsneeeirirss 5 7 Z ua ES M ameni e ceeececeacst 5 0 5 0 6 96 ie aaa raul ceca j ZOOMING 2iceeascccteedsiasskateaes 7 10 7 16 DUTION stecececxcvaiesacencteares 3 10 6 32 filter 7 18 an eday reenen in 6 7 ee ae hide asies este Sasa cetecee nneeecactene Beef IESE Fuze Edit Tool User Guide
25. 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 1023 27 25 23 27 26 23 34 35 39 41 43 51 56 59 75 87 88 117 117 126 192 120 122 252 43 0 280 98 0 334 134 0 375 159 0 404 171 0 423 1023 988 893 1023 989 893 1023 990 894 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 5 3 XML Files A 3D LUT xm1 file is a plain ASCII text file that has to conform to the XML standard It offers the following tags and attributes lt LUT3D gt The root element base tag that includes the other el ements and tags It should provide the following at tributes name The name of the 3D LUT file N The number of nodes i e 17 BitDepth The bit depth of the 3D LUT file lt values gt Child element tag that contains the R G B output values for the RGB nodes Each line consists of three values R G B The separation is made by spaces You have to define all 17 x 3 values and the triplets have to be in ascending order The values have to be stated according to the bit depth The following shows an example of a 3D LUT XML file value pairs in the middle left out lt LUT3D name DVS Example 3D LUT Nz 17 BitDepth 16 gt lt values gt 3113 0 2674 3011 0 2341 3055 0 2484 2833 0 3307 2721 0 4971 3078 0 7032 4249 0 9383 5632 O 12272 6910 0 15632 7805 O 18808 8417 0 21373 8964 0 23256 9366 O 24656 65535 65395 57730 65535 65378 57973 65535 65368 58109 lt values gt lt LUT3D gt
26. 4 37 7 4 7 23 length 3 8 3 11 3 12 6 3 6 37 reverse play Sorscsescieeetatiaradics 5 11 6 45 6 46 7 3 REVICW iccsscccsscecssecsssescseecseeees 5 12 MOVE sccsxietatssdiaxsaaseaadenieseseates 6 34 SAVE ET 4 39 7 31 MUE ClIP ti cersstesauaricctenccctouage 4 11 Settings 3 7 3 10 6 6 6 11 6 16 NAME veces sees 4 21 6 55 6 63 6 17 6 20 outpoint information 6 55 6 63 Se 5 11 5 14 pasting occ 4 18 6 37 SRY CED cose aicteniounctterasesesseeeatenn 2 7 pending esssssssssnnnsnrrirrrerereeee 4 12 NEXE er en ee S eer a ae 4 5 position necc 3 8 6 3 6 46 TYAN S uiscera saisie iniiai 3 13 6 40 prerendering Lecsicotsnecscedescteadesins 6 41 Unmark All srrsiiionninenisr 4 40 properties 3 6 4 21 6 56 6 64 Volume icsciearacasatcssagesagesaaniea 6 65 7 10 Wave irrena aa n R 6 66 real time capability 2 9 4 13 4 42 byte order sssscccscccccerrirn 6 72 relinking ziceeesse Meee 6 53 6 56 6 64 selecting in bin cecce 4 18 c selecting in timeline 6 36 sorting in bin gessesiecieeriieiacacas 4 19 cancel job sicer 4 29 sorting into folder 4 19 capacity storage s s s 1 7 SOUFCE cade ncrsacaveteseuasctes 6 53 6 58 CaptU Ng scenadveasbectestedesalisese 2 3 4 10 text information 6 54 6 62 change contents of timeline 6 59 time stretching compression 6 51 chapter Overview sxiccsccscauesssiscssieres 1 3 6 56 Catt EE 4 32 4 34 tooltip seers 6 55 6 63 6 64 CONTIOIS
27. 6 52 red line op otsceecct aastercceuetienet as 6 35 timecode 222d ie ecececiereseadeciestcaceseae 2 12 FOOD accede iioii ceire snitt 8 13 asterisk dices dees ceec ected etueae 2 14 relinking clips 6 53 6 56 6 64 drop frame sessen 2 14 6 74 reverse play i veces teases 5 11 EDL timecode 0 ccceccececececeee 8 9 SAVE ireanii rike be aata 8 5 8 6 entering snsssisinssiseiseieriree eeen 2 15 selecting clips cesesnseentavereatecrsecd 6 36 Entries S2ucsAaxccesesuscesdserdaaaindeess 2 14 time stretching compression 6 51 TONMIAU ET 2 14 6 56 greater 30 HZ xcielahctassnasstcverts 2 14 tooltip oec 6 55 6 63 6 64 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs tooltip configuration 6 9 OO siseotrernasi intenser ecto 8 13 vertical editing occ 6 59 yellow line soccer 6 42 ZOOM recreere 3 9 5 9 6 26 timeline area Maes Sonne ee ere ere 2 6 change SIZE ccce 4 2 6 5 timeline cursor 3 12 3 13 5 11 6 25 A 4 frame end marker 6 26 A 2 timeline marker ossessi 6 48 timeline element n c A 4 delete range in timeline 6 38 Curation seiorn aen 7 3 length ccecce 7 3 Properties scccscstiesidesartesnenteiedace 7 1 RESIZE EEA E TEA 6 51 timeline element properties 7 1 BCCOSSING accen 7 2 COSC EAE E AE T 7 6 effect SETUNGS lt 2 2ca2icseceeiessreees 7 12 effects list ccce 7 10 length of element nooo 7 3 of transitions ccecce 7 7 of video clips inuscvestarernaicnntawenrs 7 10
28. 77 location ccecce 4 13 PVs Index performance s 4 32 4 40 NOLAUOM iinic cerina 2 15 synchronization e 6 14 6 49 Offset eaer asn 6 8 6 73 System base video directory 4 14 8 16 source 2 12 6 10 6 71 8 9 A 4 switch notation s 2 15 6 8 T timecode frame number field 2 15 5 13 TIMOGMAG seceverisSecaccencsddeedvessensece 3 6 6 1 El Se AE AE E E 4 1 activate in outpoint s 5 14 BiN e Sew ietcesoake 4 3 add Clip tontcreresiestonms Wabecsazess 3 7 6 2 Effects no naoonnioiaooinenineeinnneneen 4 22 add clip of certain length 6 37 JODS eee eee eterna ere eee 4 29 add timeline marker n 6 48 Markers nssseissseisessresereeerere 4 30 arrange clips n c 6 34 Perform occire 4 32 blue line a onnoanonnennnnnnnnnnenennnna 6 29 table controls o n 4 33 4 39 change appearance ss 6 5 tail 3 12 3 14 6 31 6 32 6 40 6 45 change contents s es 6 59 A 4 check for inconsistencies 8 4 8 14 target group vocaiheccdeteeceeetstensceeiceece 1 4 8 15 task bar sisxsndasasasatusiainietass 2 3 2 6 2 7 clipwise rendering 0 6 71 temporary data COSE PAD coraios 6 36 clean manually cccccccceeeeees A 22 configuration eeren 6 5 prerender 0 cc eeeeeeee 2 9 6 42 control cene 6 25 prerender data location 2 11 A 23 COPY CMO soian neiii 6 37 proxy data location s es 2 11 create data list c 22 2ece cccecesnsseses 8 7 text of clips sssssnsseineeeeeeee 6 54 6 62 erae o AE E 6 20
29. Any heads and tails configured for the clip will be available with the new source material as well When linking to new material the source in and outpoint of i the original clip in the timeline are used i e its frame numbers To receive images in the timeline the new material must pro vide the same frame numbers for in and outpoint as the orig inal material 6 53 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 5 Working with Video Clips The Edit Tool works with representations of clips in the timeline only This means that as long as you perform your work on the timeline the original material on the storage is maintained and never altered The appearance of the clips in the video track s of the timeline i can be altered in several ways You can change the height of the track s and the display of the thumbnails You can also dis play an unlimited number of video tracks for a vertical editing in the timeline For more information about all this please refer to section Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area on page 6 5 This section describes several features of video clips added to the video track s of the timeline of the Edit Tool 6 5 1 The Clip s Information The video clips in the video track s of the timeline provide several in formation via their text display en I 02 47 18 lt ee 14 11 18 A Hollywood 023 VUYWOOp Figure 6 51 Representation of video clip The following information
30. Depth Codec Video Raster Eo Bib ako Ei epe Format Rates and Channels XDCAM IMX 525i 29 97 30 40 or 16 bit 0 2 4 6 8 MXF OP 1a 625i 25 50 24 bit O 2 4 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs Video Bit Audio Bit Depth Codec Video Raster PU Format Rates and Channels XDCAM HD 1440 x 1080i 23 98 18 25 35 24 bit 0 2 4 8 MXF OP 1a 25 29 97 4 2 0 720p 50 59 94 50 1080i p 23 98 25 29 97 XDCAM DVCAM 525i 29 97 4 1 1 25 16 bit O 4 MXF OP 1a 625i 25 4 2 0 DV25 525i 29 97 4 1 1 25 16 bit O 2 DV DIF 625i 25 4 2 0 DVCPRO 25 525i 29 97 25 16 bit O 2 4 MXF MXF P2 625i 25 0 2 DV DV DIF all in 4 1 1 DVCPRO 50 525i 29 97 50 16 bit 0 2 4 MXF MXF P2 625i 25 0 4 DV DV DIF DVCPRO HD 960 x 720p 50 100 16 bit 0 2 4 MXF MXF P2 59 94 0 8 DV DV DIF 1440 x 1080i 25 29 97 AVC Intra 960 x 720p 50 50 16 bit O 2 4 MXF P2 59 94 1440 x 1080i 23 98 25 4 2 0 1440 x 1080p 23 98 25 29 97 4 2 0 720p 23 98 25 100 29 97 50 59 94 1080 25 29 97 1080p 23 98 25 29 97 PVs Appendix Video Bit Audio Bit Depth Codec Video Raster p5 Format Rates and Channels DNxHD 1080p 23 98 24 25 36 16 bit 0 16 MXF OP Atom 1080p 29 97 45 Each audio channel 720p 23 98 25 60 will be recorded ina separate file Re 720
31. Details Li about Clips on page 4 10 S If a container format is selected as the file format the file will be stored in the main directory i e under Clip 6 7 6 Name Options In the DVS software you can receive during a finalizing variable information in file names via the NAME OP TIONS button The name options allow you to write certain details of your files to be created to the file names automatically With them you can provide the file names with information such as the following Project name Color space File type Video format Bit depth Sampling rate Resolution Aspect ratio Date Frame rate File format Additionally with the name options you can adapt other name related options such as the numbering of the individual image files To configure the name options you have to perform the following e Click on the button NAME OPTIONS in the finalize dialog This will open the following window 6 79 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs Name options File name prefix File name wet Color space gt _ v Add Remove Modity ons not valid for container file formats Frame number m Q auto Cancel Figure 6 64 Options to configure a variable file naming To set the name options perform the following e If not already set as desired enter a file name prefix in the entry field File name e By activating or deactivating the File name ext
32. It runs in the background of your video system and is therefore not visible Software User Interface and Software Modules The software user interface is the visible part of the DVS software pack age It consists of individual software modules which control the DVS system and are used to perform editing and video as well as audio pro cessing tasks These modules are the Edit Tool the 1 0 Tool optional the Configuration Tool and Spycer the innovative content manage ment software by DVS They are the basic software modules of the DVS Basics system i e the ones that you will use most in your every day work You can see them in the drawing above in the oval Software User Inter face e Depending on your system configuration there may be other i tools and modules available on your system Further informa tion about these can be found in their respective user guides Once the DVS software is started you can access the different modules available on your system easily via the task bar of the user interface see section The Task Bar on page 2 7 The Edit Tool The Edit Tool is the software module that allows you to assemble video and audio material on a timeline and edit them with cuts dissolves wipes etc Clips of different formats and resolutions can be added to the timeline Additionally in this module you can perform a DCI Mas tering and create properly encoded and encrypted digital cinema pac
33. a folder you may also select the folder and press the key Del on your keyboard After this a warning message will appear on the screen e If you want to delete the folder and all clips that are sorted into it confirm the warning message This will delete the respective folder where the context menu was in voked If clips were sorted into the selected folder they will be deleted as well Me Only formerly created folders can be deleted The root folder cannot be changed in any respect 4 2 5 Working with Clips in the Bin In the contents area of the bin you can see the video or audio material already added to the bin and sorted into the folders via their thumbnails and or text information If the thumbnail view is activated and a clip is selected in the contents area a scrub bar to preview your material in still images and set roughly the inpoint of the respective clip is provided by each thumbnail The Tool Area File format TIFF File path Framerate Duration Name Neuschwanstein_ File format TIFF A Resolution 1920 x 1080 pixel File path V section31 clips Color depth 8 bits File name Neuschwanstein_ 05d tif Colormode RGB 4 4 4 Frame size 6 2 MB _ Aspect ratio 1 77777778 16 9 Datarate 186 5 MB s Framerate 29 97p Duration ted Name Riesenrad File format File path Duration File format File path File name RGB 4 4 4 o1 Framerate 2 Duration Figure 4 12 Clips in the contents area of t
34. a pos iJ If you select another file than the first video frame file in a sible clip s inpoint will be set accordingly e Confirm your selection with the button OPEN The selected video or audio clip will then be added to the contents area of the bin By repeating the described steps above you can add as many clips to your bin as your project needs Once clips are available in the bin you can start working with the Edit Tool and add them to the timeline see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 Adding Clips to the Bin Using Spycer To add clips to the contents area of the bin you can also use Spycer the content management software integrated in the DVS software It is the best and most informative way to add clips to the bin because with Spycer you can for instance perform management tasks on the clip or preview it before adding it to your project Once the Spycer software module is activated with the button SPYCER in the task bar of the DVS software see section The Task Bar on page 2 7 it shows two browsing panes where you can browse for data easily Additionally you can see right below the menu bar the bin as it is available in the Edit Tool When audio or video clips are displayed in the browsing panes of Spycer they can be dragged and dropped to the contents area of the bin without any difficulty 4 9 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs Further explanations of Spycer and its usage are not
35. and Locking Tracks on page 6 32 you can easily determine the best possible solution for your work Example 1 In the example below the timeline is configured to several video tracks All tracks are enabled not muted i e all tracks will be played out Track3 M Track2 M Track1 M When a play out is initiated the result will be that clip 3 overlays the ones below it i e the ones with a lower priority Example 2 In the second example the uppermost track is now disabled muted Track2 M Track1 M When a play out is initiated this will lead to an output where clip 3 is not given out at all while the clips 2 and 4 overlay the clip 1 present in the first video track the one with the lowest priority 6 60 PVs The Timeline The display of the video tracks can be reversed via the Config i uration Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide for more information However this does not affect the play out prior ity i e the priority of the video track with the highest number over the others when enabled S 6 5 6 Displaying the Alpha Channel For blue screen operations or compositing the alpha channel key of a video clip is important With the DVS software you can display the al pha channel of individual clips in the video overlay as well as at the out puts of the DVS system To display the alpha channel of a video clip you have to activate t
36. and a list box to select one of the various video formats that the DVS system provides Choose one of the video format type buttons to display in the list box below the video formats sorted under this type Then select from the list box the desired format that the project s timeline should be rendered to The selected format will also be shown on the right side of the video configuration area in the editable resolution fields and if appropriate the pulldown drop frame items will be made available With the Matrix setting you determine the color conversion matrix that should be used if conversions between different color spaces and or scalings between different value ranges are necessary Usually with a video format in SD CCIR 601 and with a video format in HD SMPTE 274 is selected If you have selected a YUV format as the file format the YUV range setting has to be applied It specifies whether the color space range of the finalized clip will be in a restricted Head or in a full value range Full The same applies to the RGB range setting If you have se lected an RGB file format this setting will be evaluated It specifies whether the color space range of the finalized clip will be in a restricted Head or in a full value range Ful1 es Further information about color space ranges and color space i conversions can be found in the Fuze Configurations user guide In the field Timeline TC Offset select a timecode fra
37. and deletes already rendered files Delete all Cancels all render jobs listed on the tab Jobs ina single step Already rendered files will be deleted as well 4 29 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 5 The Marker Table 4 30 In the timeline of the Edit Tool you can place markers at certain posi tions e g as a reminder to cut the clip at this position at a later stage or other reasons These markers can be placed either manually in the timeline of the Edit Tool or automatically Additional information about markers and their placing can be found in section Marking Positions in the Timeline on page 6 47 as well as in section The Drop Table on page 4 38 Once markers are positioned in the timeline the tab Markers of the tool area provides further information about them After its selection and when markers are available in the timeline the area will look similar to the following Bin Effects Jobs Markers Perform Nr Action In Action Out Dur Name Marker Type Comment Thumbnail 31 09 31 09 0000 Timeline Marker 01 02 19 0001 Timeline Marker 01 02 19 01 17 07 14 18 noo2 AEL OLLY WOO D 01 17 07 01 17 22 00 15 Timeline Marker dropped 01 17 22 01 33 29 Timeline Marker dropped 02 05 09 Timeline Marker Figure 4 19 List of timeline markers in the tool area The tab Markers provides in a table a list of all timeline markers that are currently available in the timeline of the
38. are several ways to play out the timeline You can play out the whole timeline you can review a part of the timeline and you can play out a part of the timeline 6 27 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs The first two are also initiated via their respective controls of the Edit Tool the play and REVIEW button However to play out a defined part of the timeline only you have to set an in and outpoint for the timeli ne How to do this is described in section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 28 Once they are set you can initiate a play out of the defined range with the play button of the controls see section Controls on page 5 11 In addition to the controls of the user interface there are a lot of key board shortcuts available These complement the controls some of them even do not have a control element in the user interface and you can use them for a faster working with the software A list of all key board shortcuts can be found in section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 6 6 3 2 Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline 6 28 With the button to the left of the button DELETE displaying IN OUT you can set an in and outpoint for the timeline A play out or finalizing if set accordingly will then be performed in the defined range between in and outpoint only The way the timeline is played out can be configured with the i Configuration Tool see Fuze Confi
39. as of all effects visible in the effects pane PVs The Tool Area 4 4 Jobs The tab Jobs details information about the status of render operations that have been initialized in the DVS software On this tab you can find for example information about the progress of prerenderings For each triggered job one entry will be displayed Markers Perform te 0 8 fps 9 01 to go Proxy for Trans Figure 4 18 Jobs in progress Whenever possible the render jobs will be performed in the back ground of the system i e during their creation you can continue to work in the timeline of the Edit Tool as usual In case of several render jobs they will be processed one at a time in the order indicated Once the render operations are finished their entries will disappear from the list of the Jobs tab For further information about renderings in general see section i Working with Prerendered Data on page 2 9 or section Fi nalizing the Timeline on page 6 68 The corresponding clip and processed image will be displayed in the video overlay when selecting from the list the job that is currently under processing When entries are displayed in the list on the tab Jobs you can cancel the respective job and thus delete its created files For this call up the context menu on the job entry that you want to abort It offers you the following Delete Cancels the selected render job where the context menu was called
40. caret emer A 4 audio configuration 6 17 SOMBIE certae A 4 control area accen 5 9 6 26 CUISOF nariai 5 10 6 27 thumbnail ossee 3 6 4 20 SD OUTPUTS cccrnsstssuderesseessphaxtoanaus 6 13 SDI output sssssssssssnrnrrrrrrreeesreee 6 11 Set NgS scaiceniiusiiciiesissaediaricauls 6 11 selecting Clips in BiM socprisieiepeiepeinitniaie 4 18 clips in timeline acn 6 36 SEQUENCE procesSS Ng ccce 6 58 Sequencelnfo xml icc2cceceieenss 4 12 6 79 setting o 3 7 3 10 6 11 effects nccc 4 23 7 12 7 14 effects operator seee 7 12 load global settings 8 19 save defaults soxiscsccsssacscedeanaeess 8 19 save global settings 0 8 20 transition n se 6 40 SHANONESS seitcatraiiiacbiteapeatacs 7 18 TICK E TE 7 18 SEMIS occ 7 19 shortcuts cccecceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 2 A 6 single threaded I O mode 4 33 4 34 size of audio tracks isc 6 6 6 7 of timeline area cacce 4 2 6 5 Of tool area csc cnisceceseseseneseserizions 4 2 Of tracks vice eeee eee eee 6 6 6 7 of video overlay eeeeeeeeeees 5 3 of video tracks ccce 6 6 6 7 slave mode cock eset aazeinte ta rtteseeeectts 5 11 control WINdOW cceeeeees 5 14 in outpoint control window 5 14 RS 422 protocol 5 14 A 1 A 3 specifications rwitjsassstrsareireatasess A 19 slide triMMINg ocer 6 46 slip sync audio nn 6 14 Slip triMMINg osssnnnnieseeeeesseeesrrrnnn 6 46 slow MOTION 0cceeeeee ees 6 5
41. ccccccccccccceccecee 4 33 4 36 tooltip configuration 6 9 resolution n os 4 37 tIMMINg Serpe ntacecedeneteacsiersuees 6 45 check for inconsistencies 8 4 8 14 8 15 types siveadaseaceatenguarecetececansavenes 4 10 CHOMA asscodecrdsaredusssain sie actssteneey 5 5 UNKNOWN tvscaeaearadeeconenasiseey eae 4 12 CineReel a ledadlscdcesceeceede eta uacelenes 8 6 VideO weseeeeesesesseeeeeenen 4 10 6 54 clear GIN cessrsacedeserstcasdeecientetueude 8 15 yellow marking sssseeee 4 13 dip st coca ae cert ce ace eee A 1 clipboard 4 18 6 37 6 56 6 64 add to bin 3 4 4 6 8 5 clipwise rendering 2i ccssccheeceieee 6 71 add to timeline 3 6 2 CODEC ara r 6 73 A 11 add to timeline certain length 6 37 color conversion matrix 066 6 73 alpha channel 6 57 6 61 color cube ccc eee eee eeee eee eees 6 19 A 16 arrange on timeline 6 34 color scheme clips AUGIO oocccccceccccccccccecccecee 4 11 6 62 prerendering iescteeeeteeteSecenccens 6 42 change appearance video 6 7 color space range ecc 5 4 6 23 change contents only 6 46 finalize o 6 73 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide color value 05 6 23 A 14 A 15 command line 4 33 4 37 A 22 comment MEDL s s nascesteecdsstauatsaecerdeitenrate 8 9 LUT file scicasarcteniatenncanntes A 14 A 16 markers s2eaide adc verceesetedecaszceosaes 4 31 re
42. change its aspect ra tio 16 9 4 3 et al In the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide you can configure the SD outputs as well as set an output raster that the DVS software should use as the default raster after starting a new project es Rasters for film not included in the SDI standard i e 2K with i 20 Hz or more are output via the analog and DVI outputs only x In the Timeline output settings window you have further configuration possibilities at hand via the Options area at the bottom of the window There you can configure the following The video and audio track sizes as well as the number of tracks see section Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area on page 6 5 The analog audio outputs to monitor audio during your editing work see section Further Audio Configurations on page 6 16 A3D LUT file to be used for the timeline optionally avail able see section Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File on page 6 17 A cropping for the whole timeline see section Cropping the Timeline on page 6 20 The rest of the available items in this window i e the items of the areas Name and Format are described in more detail in the Fuze Configurations user guide How to Configure the Audio Output The timeline area contains several audio tracks where you can add au dio clips in the desired sequence and set fade ins and outs To output audio via
43. clips All clips in the timeline area can be selected in one step by using the menu option Select all of a timeline track s context menu 6 4 3 Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips Bin clips and timeline elements can be cut or copied to the clipboard of the operating system and afterwards pasted again at the location of your choice Further information about this can be found in section Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips on page 4 18 6 4 4 Adding Clips of a Certain Length to the Timeline If you want to fill a gap in the timeline or fill a particular part of the timeline with other video or audio material you can add a clip to the timeline with the help of the timeline s in and outpoint 3 point edit ing This will then fill the selected particular part of the timeline To add a clip of a certain length to a particular part of the timeline per form the following e Set the inpoint of the timeline at the position where the clip to be added should start see section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 28 e Set the outpoint of the timeline at the position where the clip to be added should end see section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 28 6 37 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs e Next prepare the clip to be added to the timeline as indicated in section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 for example by determining its inpoint For the next
44. editing 6 2 3 Configuring the Timeline Scale 6 8 The timeline scale can be adapted to the needs of your project You can either set a special offset or switch the notation of the scale timeline scale o 0 e800 8 29 00 Figure 6 8 The timeline scale To set a timeline offset for example to match the current project with other projects you have to use the TC Offset item of the output set tings window see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 11 The timeline of the Edit Tool will then provide this offset Additionally the timeline scale as well as all position and length indica tors in the Edit Tool can be switched from a display of the timecode no tation to frame numbers and vice versa Further information about this can be found in section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 14 Dvs The Timeline 6 2 4 Configuring the Tooltips of Clips All clips added to the timeline of the Edit Tool i e video as well as audio clips provide various information via tooltips These information will be displayed as soon as the mouse cursor is placed over a clip EMIN Type Clip Name Holhawood Resolution1920 x 1080 pixel Start 20 00 End 39 29 Length 20 00 Figure 6 9 Tooltip of video clip Then you can see for example the file name of the clip or its in and outpoint on the timeline The information displayed via the tooltips can be adjusted freely to you
45. entered in the drop table of the performance monitor and red bars will appear in the chart Then please proceed as follows e Check the position of the drops on the video timeline by double clicking entries individually or by selecting the MARK ALL button of the table controls e Afterwards perform the play out operation and the checking of the drop positions again e Then compare the results and confront them with the following table Marker Timeline k Probable Cause Solution Position Element At certain On video clip s Material at certain Check the material on the storage and position s or transitions frames faulty replace the faulty files After this the problem should be resolved At random Within certain The material has a res Finalize the timeline to a format that video clips olution that is too high can be handled in real time see sec tion Finalizing the Timeline on page 6 68 After this the problem should be resolved The storage location is not real time capable Move the material to a real time capa ble storage The storage location where the material is stored is too full Itis recommended to use only 85 of the overall storage capacity If the storage is too full delete some of the data On transition s Timeline material has a resolution that is too high for two simultane ous video streams If the respective transitions are dis played in
46. format Flexible data and still image compression standard operating either compressed or uncompressed sci4 sgi 3 x 8 bit RGB 8 bit RGB file format SGI IRIX image format Sarge 3 x 16 bit RGB 16 bit RGB file format SGI IRIX image format Targa tga 3 x 8 bit RGB Targa image format Only uncompressed vari 4 x 8 bit RGBA and ants of this format are supported 8 bit Luma TIFF tif 3 x 8 bit RGB TIFF or Tagged Image File Format in 8 bit RGB tiff 4 x 8 bit RGBA and with or without key Highly flexible and plat 8 bit Luma form independent image format Not all vari ants of this format are supported 3 x 12 bit RGB TIFF or Tagged Image File Format in 12 bit 4 x 12 bit RGBA and RGB with or without key Highly flexible and 12 bit Luma platform independent image format Not all variants of this format are supported 3 x 16 bit RGB TIFF or Tagged Image File Format in 16 bit 4 x 16 bit RGBA and RGB with or without key Highly flexible and 16 bit Luma platform independent image format Not all variants of this format are supported YUV qnt 8 bit YUV 4 2 2 and Raw 8 bit YUV file format with or without qtl YUVA 4 2 2 4 key This file has no header The image for yuv mat is recognized by the file size This is done yuv with a table of predefined file sizes Compo nent order UYVY yuv10 10 bit YUV 4 2 2 and Raw 10 bit YUV file format with or without YUVA 4 2 2 4 key This file has no header The image forma
47. iiaee iiao i aaie pai 8 15 8 5 The Options Menu sccacescacsdscsiastesaceaiceeidacsaceessanidecsesenteeset 8 17 8 5 1 Driver connect x ceed ced ees sccs cedancenetavadsvexecdasetaces 8 17 8 5 2 Configuration project tiekcteteGiecteeteectaes ate a esdazenueess 8 17 8 5 3 Configuration defaults l 8 18 8 5 4 Load configuration defaults 8 19 8 5 5 Save configuration defaults csczccttetadecnetsaxeeaseeescace 8 19 8 5 6 Load global settings cecce 8 19 8 5 7 Save global settings cecce 8 20 8 5 8 WEB service enable cc 2 c ceicecsecesceececaesesssctsectecseetenee 8 20 8 6 THE Help METU skirtiems 8 21 SiG ADOUT airen a a t e E 8 21 8 6 2 Ay Sasa eect cc aes 8 21 APPENAIX este ea eget sete erat E tee ances A 1 A 1 Glossary of Terms esl ccs xcceseiecsontnes eeceteratesisunassseeecuerelacnastacs A 1 A 2 Keyboard Shortcuts seseseseeeieeeeeeeeeererreireeerrerrrerrreerseren A 6 A 3 Supported File Formats eerren A 9 AA 1D LUT PIGS wcsscvasaceaszotaviceaiatatizsiavasieance Enara RSE NNE RE A 14 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs AS 3DLUTFIlES eee nee eee a NERT A 15 A 5 1 General Description 0 00000050ccccccecacceasasenssecesteeceaess A 15 A52 BDL FiOS rarena Eea i EE Reet Gals A 16 ASB I Sse este eet alea tence ata E EEN A 18 A 6 Slave Mode RS 422 Control A 19 A 7 System Maintenance cece reer etree teeter A 20 A 7 1 The Automatic Defragmentation Process ee A 20 A 7
48. in or outpoint L buttons see below these buttons allow you to jump to the in outpoint directly These buttons activate the in and outpoint set in E their corresponding entry fields to the right The Control Area 01 00 00 00 23 00 00 00 Pos 01 00 00 00 Close To position the in and or outpoint you can also enter a particular position in the entry fields to the right directly For an activation of an in outpoint you may press Enter or use their activation but tons see above On the one hand the Pos field indicates the cur rent position of the timeline cursor for example during a play out operation of the Edit Tool s time line On the other it can be used to move the time line cursor by entering a particular position in its entry field afterwards press Enter With this button you can play out the contents of the timeline in real time When a play out is initiat ed it will be displayed in the video overlay of the control area as well as at the video and or audio outputs of the DVS system After activation the button changes its appearance to its active state and you have to press it again to stop the play out This button toggles between the frames or fields display mode In its deactivated state the frames of a video clip are displayed when stepping one frame field backward or forward in the timeline When activated its fields will be displayed With these buttons you can step one vid
49. in the bin as one clip but consist of several indi vidual clips on the storage Usually these individual clips are stored in a subdirectory each and all subdirectories are located under one main directory When adding a multi clip to the bin via a drag and drop procedure from a file manager see section Adding Clips to the Bin with a File Manager on page 4 6 you may select the main directory as a clip and add it to the bin All individual clips will then be available as one clip in the bin Even when dragged to the timeline the multi clip is handled as one clip Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs pending clip unknown Multi clips are a necessity due to file system limitations of the operating system meaning Windows may cause problems if more than 20 000 files are stored in one di rectory However the DVS software will create multi clips automatically for example during the finalizing of a project or when recording a clip with the I O Tool Then when the clip exceeds a configurable number of frames in one directory the DVS software divides the clip and saves it in as many subdirectories as needed un der one main directory Afterwards this main directory can be added to the bin as a multi clip To recognize multi clips correctly a metadata file Sequence Info xml is created as well detailing the number of files per folder for this clip Further information about fi nalizing and the storing of a clip in s
50. indicates the overall workload of the system during a timed interval 40 ms Figure 4 21 Chart of performance monitor overall file I O workload With this setting you can find at the top left of the chart the value of the last multi threaded operation It details in certain intervals during operation the workload of all threads in percent i e the value of one bar in the chart At the top right of the chart you can find an indication about how many frames were processed total and how many drops occurred during this time When operating the system s workload is displayed via blue bars in the chart The bars may well reach the 100 line during an operation which does not necessarily mean that a drop may occur soon It simply shows that all threads of the software were processing continuously at that point of time and that no thread was idle Drops exceed the work load of the system shown in the chart They are displayed as bars in red that are cut at the top The Chart in Individual File I O Duration If the performance monitor is set to the individual file I O duration setting the chart of the performance monitor shows the access times of single files which is especially useful when the system is operating in the single threaded I O mode If used in the multi threaded I O mode 4 35 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs the drawn access times to a single file one bar may be longer because several files were re
51. its set tings can be found in the Fuze Configurations user guide 8 5 6 Load global settings With the menu option Load global settings you can load global settings previously saved to a file see section Save global settings on page 8 20 The selection of this menu option opens the standard Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs dialog window for a file selection where you have to select the file that contains the desired settings File extension cgs Global settings file After loading the new settings will be applied immediately and the ap pearance of the DVS software as well as its current configurations will be changed 8 5 7 Save global settings The project configurations as well as appearances of the DVS software can be saved as snapshot The global settings will store the statuses of the Edit Tool I O Tool and Configuration Tool With this you can cre ate for example a setting for a tape operator showing the VTR emu lation and providing all the important settings for video format color space bit depth and storage paths already predefined After configuring everything you would like to have and see select the menu option Save global settings It will open the standard dialog window to save a file where you have to specify the path and file name for the current settings to be saved File extension cgs Global settings file Once the global settings are saved you can load them
52. not match the material on the stor age you have to change them accordingly see section Changing the Properties of Clips on page 4 21 3 2 2 Adding Clips to the Timeline For the editing process the Edit Tool uses a timeline with several video and audio tracks where you can add the clips in the desired sequence as they should be played out in the end You can then for instance de fine wipes dissolves or cuts for the material There is no need to worry about your original material being in different resolutions bit depths 3 6 Getting Started timeline video track audio tracks color spaces or file formats The DVS system works format indepen dent and is capable of handling material up to 4K To view your project on an additionally connected monitor you have to configure the output format of the timeline according ly The setting of the output format video raster of the project can be configured with the button SETTINGS at the top left side of the timeline area To begin an editing work you have to drag the clips to the timeline of the Edit Tool first During all works with the DVS software your original material i will never be altered The clips in the software are only repre sentations of the original material on the storage All editing tasks are performed virtually e Select a clip clip A in the contents area of the bin and drag and drop it to the beginning of the video track Fi
53. num ber If or is displayed in an entry field a value i has not Don specified so far Drop frame Timecode Indication The last colon of the timecode format may be displayed in the software as a full stop Then the timecode fields of the software will display for example 12 25 07 instead of 12 25 07 This indicates that the drop frame timecode feature is activated When entering timecode the last colon can also be replaced by a full stop Further information about drop frame timecode can be found in the Fuze Configurations user guide Higher Frequencies and Timecode Format In the user interface of the DVS software an asterisk may be added to the timecodes e g 12 25 07 This will be the case when the video raster s frequency exceeds 30 frames per second because the original timecode format is limited to frame rates as high as that To account for video rasters with higher frequencies e g 720p at 60 Hz one timeco de number is used for several video frames meaning every second third or fourth timecode provides the same timecode number the frames notation see below is not affected These repeated timecodes are shown in the user interface with an added asterisk and at the out puts they are particularly flagged as well The standard timecodes that will be used for such procedures are 24 Hz 25 Hz and 30 Hz For ex ample a video raster frequency of 48 Hz is provided with a 24 Hz time code while a 60
54. of the context menu of an effect in the effects pane usually invoked with a right click of the mouse Markers Perform Available Operators a E titling Rename EF colorcorec Load all presets Clear all presets Figure 4 17 The context menu of the effects pane Renaming Preset Effects To rename a preset effect and thus to give it a different name once it was created in the effects pane perform the following 4 26 PVs The Tool Area e Call up the context menu on the respective preset effect and select the menu option Rename Alternatively you may click on a preset effect a second time l with the mouse After this you can change the name of the effect e Enter the new name of the preset effect via the keyboard and con firm it with the Enter key Then the selected effect will be given the new name By renaming preset effects you can also assign function keys as i keyboard shortcuts to them For further information about the gt appropriate naming conventions see section Creating Preset Effects via the Keyboard on page 4 24 Deleting Preset Effects Preset effects can be deleted either individually or all in one step To delete an individual preset effect perform the following e Call up the context menu on the preset effect that you want to delete and select the menu option Delete This will delete the respective preset effect where the context menu was invoked To delete al
55. of the defragmentation process once more After copying or recording large amounts of data to the stor AN age it is recommended to leave the DVS software running for a longer period of time e g over night without performing any real time tasks play out or record or having the slave mode VTR task mode activated This will give the defrag mentation tool time to reorganize the files on the storage for an optimized real time performance For this you may also start the defragmentation process manually see section Starting the Process Manually on page A 22 A 21 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs Starting the Process Manually The defragmentation process can also be started manually for exam ple if its automatic starting during the starting of the DVS software is disabled To run the defragmentation process manually perform the following Before starting the defragmentation process manually make AN sure that the DVS software is no longer running on your sys tem A manually started process forces a defragmentation at all times meaning regardless of the state of the DVS system e g real time operation a defragmentation will be per formed This may result in a limited real time performance e Open a command line for example via All Programs DVS Maintenance cmd e Type in the command avusdefrag lt drive gt i The default value for lt drive gt is V e After this press Enter Thi
56. opens the following window Audio monitoring PS Analog audio OutputA Channel 1 2 Output B Channel 3 4 OK Figure 6 15 Analog audio configuration The settings Output A and Output B configure the first and second analog monitoring output of the DVS system respectively Select from the com bo boxes the audio channels that should be given out at the respective analog output Once everything is set as desired the audio configuration is complete and you can monitor the audio output as configured via the analog and digital audio outputs of the DVS system 6 2 8 Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File With a three dimensional look up table 3D LUT file you can for ex ample simulate the typical look of a projected motion picture film on a monitor connected to the digital video interfaces of the DVS system The Edit Tool supports 3D look up tables from various suppliers such as ARRI or Kodak To apply a 3D LUT you have to load its file first and create a profile for it Afterwards the loaded 3D LUT file has to be en abled for the DVS software N The 3D LUT support of the DVS software is an optional fea i ture Depending on the configuration of your DVS system it may not be available Via the SETTINGS button you can access the items to load a 3D LUT file into the Edit Tool It is located at the 6 17 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 18 top left side of the timeline area After pressing this button t
57. operations the performance will be displayed via bars in the chart can process several image files simultaneously multi threaded iJ The DVS software can operate in two different O modes It I O mode or one file at a time single threaded I O mode Although the multi threaded I O mode is the recommended mode for the DVS software because it is more flexible and fast er it can be set to a single threaded I O mode via a setting available in the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide for more information The performance monitor can be switched between two measurings for the performance of the system Overall file I O workload With this setting the performance monitor measures the overall workload of the system that occurred during a timed interval Individual file I O duration This measuring is especially useful when operating in a single threaded I O mode Then the performance monitor displays the access times of single files The Tool Area You can switch between the two measurings with a setting available in the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide They and their effect on the drawn charts will be explained in the following Missing frames on the storage are not registered by the perfor mance monitor as drops The Chart in Overall File 1 O Workload If the performance monitor is set to the overall file I O workload set ting the chart
58. outpoint will be set accordingly raat This button will be available when the DELETE button is activated Then it will delete both the in and outpoint simultaneously The length of the currently selected range will be indicated in the field directly below the timeline scale Ft p ene timeline length 42 15 15 09 12 16 WLY WOO p a iAmerican_Beat Figure 6 30 Timeline length indicator Setting an In Outpoint To set an in outpoint perform the following e Move the timeline cursor via its controls or manually see section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 25 to the position where the in outpoint should be set e Press the in or outpoint button E EI An in outpoint can only be defined once If you set it anew i the previous one will be replaced To set an in or outpoint you may also use the entry fields to the right of the buttons The in outpoint will be set at this position The still selected part of the timeline will be displayed as usual whereas the deselected part is shown in a dimmed fashion in the video and audio tracks Furthermore in the timeline scale the selected part of the timeline will be marked with a blue line 6 29 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs log 09 E L a aa aaa 142 09 7 01 26 Da Da aa ee oL Woon HOLLYWOOD Figure 6 31 Timeline with set in and outpoint With a set in and outpoint a play out of the timeline will then be per formed between
59. part of this user guide You can find them in the Spycer user guide time the initial setup of the application may be launched In or der to run Spycer you have to specify these see the Spycer user guide for further details i When the software module of Spycer is started for the first Adding Clips to the Bin via a Capturing Clips can also be added to the bin by performing a capture operation with the optionally available 1 O Tool of the DVS software Once the record is finished the recorded clip s will be available in the contents area of the bin Contrary to all previously described methods to add a clip to the bin this procedure will set the properties of the clips correctly No manual configuration of their properties will be necessary for example to cor rect their color space field mode etc see attention note in section Adding Clips to the Bin on page 4 6 The exact procedure how to add clips to the bin via a capture operation is not described in this user guide It is in detail explained in the Fuze I O Tool user guide 4 2 3 Details about Clips 4 10 During the adding of clips to the bin the clips are checked for their type length resolution bit depth etc If set accordingly the text infor mation of the clips in the bin will show you these information about the clips see also section Changing the View of Clips on page 4 5 This section provides some details about clips in
60. saved projects into the currently loaded project The bin as well as clips present in the timeline including all transitions and effects settings will be imported With this feature you can for example as semble a master project from smaller projects which contain individual scenes In general the menu option Insert Project works like the menu op tion Open section Open on page 8 4 but instead of opening a project it will be inserted into the currently active project at the posi tion of the timeline cursor The clips in the bin of the inserted project will be added to the bin of the current project in a further subfolder car rying the name inserted project You can adjust the inserting of projects to your liking with the i Configuration Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide for D more details There you can for instance adjust the name of the bin subfolder where the bin clips will be added 8 2 5 Add clip The menu option Add clip performs the same operation as the Add clip menu option on the context menu of the bin s contents area See section Adding Clips to the Bin Using the Add Clip Menu Options on page 4 8 for further information about this 8 2 6 Save With the menu option Save you can save the current project If the ed ited project file was a new one a dialog window opens where you have to specify the storage path and file name for the project Project files are by defau
61. section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 14 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 5 The Slave Mode Control Window 5 14 The DVS software provides in some of its software modules a slave mode Usually it can be activated with the button SLAVE Then the fol lowing window may be displayed on the screen allowing you to control the respective software module without relinquishing the slave mode Slave mode x Remote protocol Figure 5 12 Slave mode control In slave mode the DVS system will behave like a VTR by using preroll postroll etc The specifications of these parameters can be found in sec tion Slave Mode RS 422 Control on page A 19 This section ex plains the items provided by the Slave mode window and their format refer to section About Timecode Frame i For more information about timecode frame number fields Number Fields on page 2 14 Select from the Remote protocol combo box the RS 422 protocol that should be used to control the DVS system see also section Slave Mode RS 422 Control on page A 19 In The buttons IN and OuT enable you to select an Out in outpoint directly from the current position of the timeline cursor Move the timeline cursor via the Pos field see below or its controls see below to the position that you want to set Then press the respective button and the entry field to its right will take on the selected position With an activated
62. setting This menu option resets the selected setting of the parameters list It removes all additional keyfra mes from the keyframing line restores its default values and sets it back to Linear The button RESET sets all settings of the parameters list back to their default values and states i e all additional keyframes will be removed from their keyframing lines their default values will be restored and their curving will be linear again 7 8 2 Viewing the Graph Because an effect is valid for a single clip in the timeline the graph of the keyframe editor usually shows the timeline of the selected clip Nev ertheless it can be set to a viewing zooming of your needs When trimming a clip in the timeline while the keyframing ed i itor is visible the trimming will be displayed in the graph The trimmed parts will be shown dimmed with a blue hue 7 23 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs Add 7 24 06 20 Delete Graph Zoom Figure 7 17 The graph To work on a selected part of a clip you can use the button FRAME IN OUT Set the timeline s in and outpoint to the part you want to zoom into and press this button The graph will then display the select ed part only The graph will show the timeline s in and outpoint same as the i timeline Any deselected part will be displayed in a dimmed fashion A zooming can also be performed with the button GRAPH ZOOM Press ing this button while moving with the m
63. sholh Figure 4 24 Drop table of performance monitor The entries provide information for example about the date and time when the drop occurred or if detected as well about the file that was the cause for this drop Drops are reported by the real time core of the DVS software In some cases it may not be able to provide information about the file name and or path You can retrieve further information about the location where the drop occurred by double clicking an entry in the drop table Then the time line cursor will jump to the approximate location where the drop hap pened and a timeline marker will be placed at this position in the timeline 4 38 PVs The Tool Area timeline marker Figure 4 25 Timeline marker in timeline Additional information about timeline markers can be found in i section Marking Positions in the Timeline on page 6 47 and section The Marker Table on page 4 30 Furthermore with the controls below the table you can for example save the results shown in the drop table to a file see section The Table Controls on page 4 39 4 6 5 The Table Controls With the table controls below the drop table you can for example save the results written in the drop table to a file or set markers in the time line of the Edit Tool where drops occurred Additional information about timeline markers can be found in section Marking Positions in the Timelin
64. sor to cutting points on the timeline Use the respective button or key to go to the cutting point between the clips timeline cursor Figure 3 11 Timeline cursor at cutting point This will make the button TRANS available in the user interface e Select the button TRANS A transition appears between the two clips ed timeline cursor 0 AY e transition Staples_Ufo_Nigt Figure 3 12 Transition in timeline With the transition available between the two clips you can now call its properties for example to change the type of wipe for the transition 3 13 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs e With the mouse double click the transition in the timeline The properties will be shown instead of the visible audio tracks right be low the timeline area see section Properties of a Transition on page 7 7 e With the properties of the transition available select as a transition type for example Vertical Wipe from the list box mz To the left of the properties area you can also set the duration i of the transition frame accurately Simply type in the duration and confirm it with the Enter key This will apply the selected transition type to the transition between the two clips You may now use the controls of the Edit Tool to review its outcome i In the insert mode there must be enough head and or tail available of at least one clip to set a transition otherwise the button TRANS w
65. stor age for video and audio as well as project related data only Save other data on the system disks When adding clips to the bin with a procedure other than a record some properties may not be discerned properly due to missing file header information Then they will either be de duced from the file format color space etc of the clip or configured to the currently set timeline output settings If the properties of the clip do not match the material on the stor age you have to change them accordingly see section Changing the Properties of Clips on page 4 21 Adding Clips to the Bin with a File Manager In the following it is described how to use a standard file manager of the operating system to move video or audio clips to the bin PVs The Tool Area e Open a Windows file manager for example the Windows Explorer with the keyboard combination Windows 4 E e Inthe file manager select an audio or video file either a file within a directory or the directory itself on the storage where the video data is stored For a list of the supported file formats see section Support ed File Formats on page A 9 e Drag and drop the selected file directory to the contents area of the bin with the help of the mouse You can also drop the file directory on a folder in the folder area of the bin e g the root folder Name Size la E Hollywood 00000 yuv 4 050 KB E Hollywood 00001 yuv
66. the data list or replaced by hard cuts instead the created EDL should provide Creating the EDL Once the settings to export a data list are complete you can start its creation with the buttons below the area Options EXPORT Use this button to start the creation of the data list When successful this window will be closed CANCEL This button closes the window without creating a data list Time stretching or time compression information will not be i observed during the creation of the data list see section Time Stretching or Time Compression of Clips on page 6 51 8 2 10 Finalize With the menu option Finalize you can generate a new clip from a project s timeline in a freely configurable format and raster without af fecting the original material This is in detail described in section Final izing the Timeline on page 6 68 PVs The Menus 8 2 11 Prerender all With the Prerender all menu option you can prerender all parts of the timeline that need to be processed before a play out together in one step A prerendering may be indicated prior to a play out when the DVS system is not able to handle the contents of the timeline in real time for instance a special operator Further information about this can be found in section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 41 Depending on the number of elements to be prerendered the i length of the elements an
67. the image counter clockwise and by dragging the slider to the right or en tering positive values you can rotate the image clockwise Slider Entry Field Slider Menen Rotation Values Rotation left K3 negative right A positive out see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 41 The check box Keyframing activates keyframing for this RPE effect Further information about this can be found in section Keyframing on page 7 21 i If a clip is rotated the clip has to be prerendered prior to a play 7 20 PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 8 Keyframing For effects there may be keyframing available It allows you to use the effect on a clip s timeline with definable points of settings keyframes With this you can easily configure for instance smooth transitions be tween these effect s settings for example to fade in the effect during a play out of the clip This feature is available for zooming and panning see section The Operator Zoom Pan on page 7 16 For a description how to activate it please refer to the section of the above mentioned effect Once activated for the respective effect the keyframe editor will be dis played in the settings pane of the effect Keyframe Editor 05 00 06 20 08 10 Frame In Out Graph Zoom X Colors Figure 7 14 Keyframe editor With the keyframe editor a keyframing of the effect s settings can be se
68. the timeline the additional channels will be added to the other au dio tracks below the selected one This section describes several features of audio clips added to the audio tracks of the timeline 6 6 1 The Clip s Information Audio clips in the audio tracks of the timeline provide several informa tion via their text display 14 55 933 14 59 436 14 59 3 fAudio SingSingSing 0 1 03 504 Audic Figure 6 54 Representation of audio clip The following information are provided top left Exact inpoint of clip on the timeline with the time line set to the timecode notation the seconds and frames will be shown as seconds in a decimal num ber i e with milliseconds when the frame notation is activated the inpoint will be displayed in milli seconds only 6 62 The Timeline top right Exact outpoint of the clip on the timeline minus one sample with the timeline set to the timecode notation the seconds and frames will be shown as seconds in a decimal number i e with milliseconds when the frame notation is activated the outpoint will be displayed in milliseconds only bottom left Name of the clip as it is available in the bin together with its folder path in curly brackets the audio channels streams of the clip indicating its audio mode e g 0 1 meaning a stereo stream of channel O and 1 or 0 0 meaning a mono stream of channel O bottom right Length duration of the clip bin For this the clip mus
69. the DVS software The Clip Types You can add video audio and so called multi clips to the contents area of the bin video clip Video clips are seen in the contents area of the bin usually with their thumbnail previews When a clip is se lected a scrub bar below the thumbnail will be available that can be used to preview the clip in still images and se lect an inpoint of the clip roughly if en abled via the Configuration Tool The Tool Area audio clip invalid clip multi clips To use audio in the Edit Tool you have to make the files available the same way as with video files You have to add them to the bin as described in sec tion Adding Clips to the Bin on page 4 6 The DVS software supports audio clips that contain more than one mono or stereo channel multiple channels in the audio file These clips will be avail able as one clip in the bin but when added to the timeline the additional channels will be added to the other au dio tracks below the selected one This icon indicates a video clip whose data is currently not available or an in valid clip Then wait a few seconds and give the software time to gather the data If after that the icon is still visible you have to set the properties of this clip correctly via its context menu or provide the right video material on the storage to receive a valid clip in the bin Multi clips are clips of either video or audio that are present
70. the control area at its very bottom and to the left Simply enlarge or reduce the area by dragging the edges see section Changing the Size of the Tool Area on page 4 2 5 2 2 The Video Scopes To make sure that the images comply with broadcast standards the vid eo overlay of the Edit Tool provides video scopes to help you during such tasks With them you can view the material image for image if necessary and assess the different color values The scopes can be ac tivated via the context menu of the video overlay YUV parade Waveform Above overlay Figure 5 3 The context menu of the video overlay 5 3 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs The DVS software offers various scopes to choose from Among them you can find waveform vectorscope and parade monitors Once one of the available video scopes is selected the control area will change its appearance and two items will be displayed the left one shows the se lected video scope while the right one displays the video overlay as usual 5 4 Figure 5 4 Video scope in control area With the menu option Above overlay available on the context menu of the control area this layout can be altered When the menu option is deactivated the scope and the overlay are displayed separately in the control area when activated the selected video scope will be superim posed on the video overlay Figure 5 5 RGB parade superimposed on video overlay Most video scop
71. the left slider you can zoom in or out of the timeline keyboard shortcuts Up Arrow and Down Arrow If the slider is set to the left most point you are able to see the whole contents of the timeline When it is set more to the right you will zoom into the timeline When you have zoomed into the timeline you can change the viewing position of the timeline with the right slider You can go to the end of the timeline by pulling this slider to the right and to the beginning of the timeline by pulling it to the left Via the Configuration Tool button CONFIG or Options Configuration defaults group General you can set the way the Edit Tool performs a zooming on the timeline There you can set whether zooming should occur on the position of the timeline cursor or on the current viewing position of the timeline For our example project we aim at having only two clips in the video track For this it is best to view the complete contents of the timeline e If appropriate use the sliders below the audio tracks in the timeline area to zoom out of your project Move the left slider to the left until you see the complete timeline When you have changed the view of the timeline you will see a screen like the following Figure 3 6 Project in timeline 3 9 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs The buttons right in front of the timeline tracks video as well i as audio determine whether a track is muted barre
72. the needs of your project e g by defining a special offset Furthermore you have to define the necessary output format of the timeline for example to view your project on a monitor connected to the DVS system or to play out the timeline All this will be described in the following sections Most configurations and settings will be stored together with your project in a project file 6 2 1 Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area Because in the timeline area most of the editing work is performed you can change its layout freely to adapt it to your personal needs for a more comfortable working The layout of the timeline area can be changed in several ways for example by adjusting the size of the video and audio tracks Changing the Area Size Manually You can change the size of the timeline area manually For this move the upper edge of the timeline area up or down with the mouse to en large or reduce the timeline area The size of the tool and control area together with its video overlay will adjust itself automatically Delete Figure 6 3 Adjusting the size of the timeline area If you pull the edge completely down the timeline area can be i hidden You can also pull the edge completely up to hide the tool and control area The same way you can adjust the size of the audio track area Take the edge directly above the audio tracks and move it up or down If you pull the edge completely down the audio tracks will b
73. tions will be performed in real time but sharpness cannot be controlled manually Bilinear real Applies a bilinear filtering to the zoomed im time age and may be appropriate for greater scal ing factors It is real time capable but sharpness cannot be controlled manually Timeline Element Properties Filter Meaning Adaptive Filter real time Default setting for the Zoom Pan opera tor It provides an optimized filtering for ev ery scaling factor which will result in high end quality pictures This filter is real time capable Adaptive Filter real time Doubles the precision and quality of the Adaptive Filter by using hardware resourc es that are normally used to calculate transi tions in real time When this filter is selected for zoomed clips transitions between these clips may require a prerendering see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 41 This can be avoided by either removing a scaling or setting the clips to the default Adaptive Filter AdaptiveExtra Filter real time Downconvert real time Same as the Adaptive Filter with the sharpness and details of the pictures further enhanced Special filter available for a conversion of clips in larger resolutions to lower ones re ducing interlace flickering as well Optimized for a conversion of HD material to SD Downconvert real time Same as the D
74. to the timeline of the Edit Tool at the current po sition of the timeline cursor How to Set Markers Automatically Markers can also be positioned automatically For this perform the fol lowing e Select from the context menu of the timeline scale the menu option Set markers automatically This will open the following window Automatic Markers Marker Type Timeline Maker Set Marker from InfOut x Number of Markers _ Time interval Option __ Delete existing Timeline Marker OK Cancel Figure 6 48 Dialog to add markers to the timeline automatically e Configure the settings to automatically position markers according to your requirements e Afterwards generate the markers by clicking the OK button This will create the markers of the selected type in the timeline of the Edit Tool 6 48 The Timeline How to Remove Markers from the Timeline To remove a single marker and delete it from the timeline perform the following e Jump with the timeline cursor to the respective timeline marker that you want to remove or place the timeline cursor manually on its position e Then call up the context menu and select the menu option Remove marker This will remove the timeline marker from the timeline You also have the possibility at hand to remove all timeline markers in one step from the timeline For this select the menu option Remove all markers from the context menu 6 4 12 Attac
75. tool of the DVS software A clip present in the bin of the DVS software A clip can either be an audio or video clip See audio clip and video clip respectively Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 2 container format cutting edit point data list drop dropped frames audio EDL effect embedded operator frame end marker full head vs full head vs tail File format that contains audio as well as video data in a single file only i e the video and audio files are not stored as single image or audio files but together in one file e g QuickTime or MXF A cut between clips New cuts can be created with the button EDIT of the timeline area The general term for ALEs EDLs or cut lists However in the software as well as this manual they may also be referred to as EDLs i e im plying not the standard but the term edit deci sion list in general Either frames image files or audio data that the DVS system could not load from or write to the storage in time for the performed real time op eration Edit decision list A list that describes a timeline with clips together with a series of operators ef fects EDLs can be created offline and passed to the online workstation to perform the final con forming See also data list See operator An operator such as a transition that is embed ded in the timeline and visible as a timeline ele ment When zoomed far into the timeli
76. under process ing or to zoom further into the graph see section Viewing the Graph on page 7 23 When moving the graph s timeline cursor with the mouse its exact po sition is displayed to the left of the cursor Figure 7 20 Exact positioning 1 Additionally you can move the timeline cursor with the menu option Set Marker Position of the graph s context menu see figure 7 18 on page 7 25 It will open a small window in the graph where the position of the timeline cursor can be entered Marker 00 00 09 15 05 12 Ok Figure 7 21 Exact positioning 2 The range of possible values that can be entered is indicated in the win dow in square brackets Once a correct position is entered the marker can be positioned there exactly either by using the OK button of the window or by pressing Enter Furthermore there are some buttons available at the bottom of the keyframe editor that allow you to move the graph s cursor my You can jump to particular points in the graph with these buttons e g to keyframes and the begin ning end of a clip The first button jumps to a pre viously located point in the graph while the second button jumps to the next one Timeline Element Properties EE ey With these buttons you can step one frame field for or backward in the clip currently under process ing The cursor will move accordingly Alternatively you may use the keyboard shortcuts Left Ar row Right Ar
77. will provide you with help information about the various menu options available via the menu bar of the DVS software The help information will be displayed when you place the mouse cursor over one of the menu options PVs Basics 2 4 Working with Prerendered Data With the DVS system you can perform most operations in real time When playing out the workstation is capable of handling two data streams of 2K material for transitions in real time However Fuze may not be able to handle all types of operators e g transitions or clips in real time In such a case the DVS system offers you the possibility to prerender the material and or operators prior to a play out e When working with prerendered files additional data image Li files will be created on your main storage It is recommended to store these project specific for each project separately For further information about this please refer to section Notes on Project Management on page 2 11 x You can set the storage location of such files for each project differently via the Configuration Tool on the tab Project group Project field Path for proxy data see Fuze Config urations user guide Prerendering generates proxies from clips and operators in the timeline that are not real time capable A prerendering means that the Edit Tool calculates the respective clips and operators e g transitions before a play out takes place and stores the
78. with a double click of the mouse on the timeline scale see sec tion Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 34 While the starting point of the clip its position and inpoint within the timeline is determined during the drag and drop procedure by the po sition of the mouse pointer its outpoint usually is defined by the length of the clip You can change these attributes easily after the clip was add 6 3 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs ed to the timeline as described in section Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Elements on page 6 43 7n If more than one clip is selected for the drag and drop proce i dure the Edit Tool will either align the clips horizontally in one track of the timeline or put each clip into another track directly below the selected one This drag and drop behavior can be configured with the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configura tions user guide If you drag an audio clip to the timeline that contains more than one mono or stereo channel multiple channels the ad ditional channels will be added to the other audio tracks below the selected one 6 4 PVs The Timeline 6 2 Configuring the Timeline Because the timeline is the most important part of the Edit Tool it can be configured freely and thus adapted to your individual needs For a more comfortable working you can change the layout of the timeline area in various ways You can also adjust the timeline scale to
79. 0 000000 0 0 2 0 013672 0 000000 0 000000 0 0 3 0 015625 0 001953 0 000000 0 0 4 0 017578 0 003906 0 000000 0 0 5 0 019531 0 005859 0 000000 0 0 1022 0 999023 0 988281 0 999023 0 0 1023 0 999023 0 991211 0 999023 DVS Appendix A 5 3D LUT Files Three dimensional look up table 3D LUT files are used for color cor rections and or color space conversions by defining output color values for input values They are available in various formats either encrypted e g e3d or unencrypted e g 3d1 or xm1 This section de scribes the unencrypted 3D LUT files A 5 1 General Description A 3D LUT file lists triplets of values for a color transformation Depend ing on the color depth of the 3D LUT each triplet of values R G B specifies the output values for a certain RGB node i e the resulting mapped values of input values The RGB nodes input values are not explicitly listed in a 3D LUT file In a 3d1 file they are available in the first un gt commented line of the file and determine bit depth and number of nodes for the 3D LUT In an xm1 file these information are set as attributes of the 3D LUT tag The DVS hardware can handle 17 nodes in a 3D LUT with an accuracy of 12 bit meaning 17 nodes for R times 17 nodes for G times 17 nodes for B 17 x 17 x 17 173 4913 R G B values The nodes determine the RGB input values Nodes as for example listed in a 3d1 file 17 nodes 10 bit O 64 128 192 256 3
80. 0 bit RGB format Subset of the ANSI SMPTE DPX file format Flexible file format by Kodak allowing for variable image headers DPX 2 dpx 3x 8bitRGBand 8 bit RGB file format with or without key 4 x 8 bit RGBA SMPTE Standard File Format for digital mov ing picture exchange 8 bit YUV 4 2 2 and YUVA 4 2 2 4 8 bit YUV file format with or without key SMPTE Standard File Format for digital mov ing picture exchange 3 x 10 bit RGB and 4 x 10 bit RGBA 10 bit RGB file format with or without key SMPTE Standard File Format for digital mov ing picture exchange 10 bit YUV 4 2 2 and 10 bit YUV file format with or without key YUVA 4 2 2 4 SMPTE Standard File Format for digital mov ing picture exchange 3 x 12 bit RGB 12 bit RGB file format SMPTE Standard File Format for digital moving picture exchange 3 x 16 bit RGB 16 bit RGB file format SMPTE Standard File Format for digital moving picture exchange A 9 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs Format Default File storage ae Description Name Extension format JPEG2000 jp2 3 x 10 bit RGB 10 bit RGB file format Flexible data and still jpc image compression standard operating either compressed or uncompressed 3 x 12 bit RGB 12 bit RGB file format Flexible data and still image compression standard operating either compressed or uncompressed 3 x 12 bit XYZ 12 bit XYZ file
81. 1 6 56 snapping mode 3 8 3 11 6 35 Saps HO eisien 8 20 SOAP interface ccce 8 20 SOFTNESS oe ecececccecceeceeeeueeeeeeeueeaeeeues 7 9 software modules ccce 2 2 2 7 software structure ccccceeceeeeeees 2 2 sorting Clips iN DiN sc22edeaistesetumceecccetaien 4 19 clips into folders bin 4 19 columns in DIN nsee 4 5 effects cncsecscncacecaxedinssencadecadanes 4 28 folders in bin wo cece ees 4 15 timeline markers s src 4 31 source material EXPO drieen cernita inene ineo AaS 6 58 relinking ccccccccccencrcn 6 53 Source TC oo ccceceeceeeeeeeeeeees 6 10 6 71 source timecode 2 12 6 10 6 71 8 9 A 4 Le IO eee eee ee eee ee 2 13 finalizing ssscesdesiicnietacinciedienoats 6 70 POSIT ccce 2 12 6 70 GUIS OL orien na td 2 13 Virtual aenn 2 13 6 10 8 9 SDYVCED ceesre 2 3 2 7 4 9 irla A E ates 6 59 start index finalizing ee 6 82 starting of play 22sec 5 12 5 15 starting of program ecce 3 2 starting point CUP ee 3 8 6 3 transition aus2dascarcanciartustitela danced 7 9 status MeESSagesS ccc 2 8 performance monitor 4 33 4 37 LEl KETO cciecsentecedehadet cbdeseoeeeeas 6 14 6 63 StEreOSCOPY cdcetaceteresteast eeetceodiuas 1 6 still image format aee A 9 stopping of play usses 5 12 5 15 storage oseese 1 7 3 4 4 6 4 40 CAPACI ae eo ka 1 7 CONTENTS osisisiseisererererrrnn 2 3 4 9 disk space aczencccetececsannietncorencrat 2 9 files per folder finalizing 6 73 6
82. 1c cccisciecsiesicsetetssteasdccteetiesesnies 4 32 461 We Maths scsceseicgcacevie naa eee 4 34 4 6 2 Chart Controls en eee regen 4 36 4 6 3 The Status Bai ce cectes se cccessigsasseanegaaeses serach uakae te eearceneie 4 37 4 6 4 The Drop Table cscs ccc ccccs icicles scadinatteedsbieabeecebisedss 4 38 4 6 5 The Table Controls seiecteicauedeelgenteed eieeieeiedeeecorets 4 39 4 6 6 Using the Performance Monitor eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 40 The Control PCa cc steecct sce Scccerectecesssle eee ge tierieeectereeceacteeed 5 1 5 1 Maximizing the Control Area erreen 5 2 5 2 The Video Overlay gemeneeee erennpr ee herent etn rr reere Peeenerenirrrr mre etrore 5 2 5 2 1 Configuring the Video Overlay c e 5 2 5 2 2 TheVideo SCOPES iisisti aii 5 3 5 3 The Scrub Bar of the Control Area ece 5 9 DA CONOIS ree E rrr erst ets 5 11 5 5 The Slave Mode Control Window n 5 14 The Timeline eee csscsctecastceenes es ecbees easier eerie cerca eetees 6 1 6 1 Adding Clips to the Timeline ovate aiicc es ss ce vereeieasceesseverevoeniets 6 2 6 2 Configuring the Timeline a o ec2dscncesesecevsccecctecesibecanstneteesniesnes 6 5 Contents 6 2 1 Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area 004 6 5 6 2 2 Changing the Appearance of Video Clips 000 6 7 6 2 3 Configuring the Timeline Scale stsccccccceceeeeraisseretedied 6 8 6 2 4 Configuring the Tooltips of Clips lt iccccccsssecvsvnieesssesssenenenes 6 9 6 2 5 Changin
83. 2 6 17 7 1 QUID OIND scsesetiresjesrertesetuas 3 8 6 3 A 4 delete 2igecssdeow 6 28 6 29 6 30 l 8 handler cccceccssceeeeceeeeeeeees 6 43 handler trimming 008 6 45 information ccc 6 55 6 63 setting for timeline 6 28 6 29 setting in timeline 3 11 6 43 slave mode control 064 5 14 outpoint entry field 6 28 output alpha channel 6 57 6 61 analog video ccecce 6 11 iE To l o MEPE E T 6 13 CIOD aaranineiiik rinore 6 20 default video raster 06 6 13 DMI e E 6 11 format information 06 2 8 SD Vid O annie ara 6 13 E EEA EEE A 6 11 AAO c10 M 5 2 6 11 overlay see video overlay overview of chapters dermnacssstvsseresetestasandsen 1 3 software structure 00ceeee 2 2 user interface cccecceseceeeeees 2 5 overwrite mode 3 8 6 31 6 35 attaching clips cxsesvetenrtardiesenedis 6 50 P pPaNNINE eaiiatcewteteariecigicentncets 7 10 7 16 TEMIS veencaetcenn evvaccevchcRecdineeseets 7 17 past anise 4 18 6 37 6 56 6 64 PCI video board cccceceseeeeeeaees 2 2 PDF documentation 0 085 8 21 performance monitor nsec 4 32 chart sairaan araka 4 32 4 34 chart controls 0 0 4 33 4 36 chart resolution c cc0cceeees 4 37 disabled snscicsccasanesanvcsonas 4 33 4 41 drop sencanetosronsia 4 35 4 36 drop location sescsscerencsticcecsesene 4 38 drop table c
84. 2 Burbank CA 91502 USA Phone 1 818 846 3600 Fax 1 818 846 3648 E mail info dvsus com Internet http www dvsus com Support E mail support dvsus com l I Contents I l 1 Introduction ooo ceccecceccsecessssesseesesssesseesesneestseeseeseteeteseeeeeee 1 1 TI PQ 5 ta ee a E E 1 3 2 larget COU sosiaa epi aapa aa 1 4 1 3 Conventions Used in this User Guide cceeeeeeeeeeee 1 5 1 4 Important NOteSiiiisiiiiriritciocsno aariin aaen 1 7 1 5 New in the Edit Tool s tcccevecanstunatcendiviascesresmeievenseeyeeerieoianes 1 8 2 BASICS AAE EEA AE EAA EENEN 4 2 1 Overview of the Software Structure seeen 2 2 2 2 Overview of the User Interface ccis ccccseeiscccesedecaseeciectenesdascaes 2 5 2 3 The Task gt gee eer en enterica epee n eater o aa one rerr Retr ener 2 7 2 4 Working with Prerendered Data o n 2 9 2 5 Notes on Project Management sciciscstiverestsvsdscsivversesieves deers 2 11 2 6 Notes on Source Timecode and Keycode ceeeeeeeee 2 12 2 6 1 About Source Timecode 2oscsscteireidcetepines ettere Rescezegecnne 2 12 2 6 2 About Keycode essssssssesrrrsrererrrrrrrrerarirrresrnrererenenee 2 13 2 7 About Timecode Frame Number Fields ceeeereeee 2 14 3 Getting Started o oo cece cscs cssssesseessessseessseesseessseesseeseeeeen 3 1 3 1 Starting the Program setccsaicticrsslearscssercxacenccesestovsbansectecaebesnttnts 3 2 3 2 First Steps in th Edit TOO a sciri
85. 2 Cleaning Temporary Data Manually sace A 22 l Tae A E AEE AA AEE l 1 vi Introduction This documentation describes how to use the Edit Tool of Fuze manu factured by DVS Fuze is a powerful delivery system for digital cinema content that can be used for example to create encrypted or unencrypted Digital Cine ma Packages ready for shipment to cinemas Furthermore it handles stereoscopic content just as easily as if it were 2D material including subtitles Video data is stored and worked with in its original uncom pressed format independent of resolution color space and bit depth All formats and resolutions can be processed from SD up to 2K and the final result can be played out in a freely selectable format Conver sions and calculation times for render processes are rarely necessary be cause of the high quality hardware developed by DVS Additionally up to 16 channels of audio can be output by Fuze and their data can be accessed and processed in the software as easily as the video material All video and audio data are stored in the Windows file system and thus accessible right away when working with other applications The Edit Tool of Fuze is the main part of the DVS software package It is a software module that enables you to add video and audio clips to a timeline in any sequence you like and in a freely configurable number of tracks When working with video you can edit your material with cuts dissolves wipes
86. 20 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 1023 Resulting in the following RGB nodes of node 1 2 3 17 18 19 20 34 35 36 289 290 291 4911 4912 4913 R G B 0 0 0 0 0 64 0 0 128 0 0 1023 0 64 0 0 64 64 0 64 128 0 64 1023 0 128 0 0 128 64 0 1023 1023 64 0 0 64 0 64 1023 1023 896 1023 1023 960 1023 1023 1023 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs For the 17 nodes 17 output R G B values have to be set in the 3D LUT file The first triplet describes the output value of the first node the second triplet of the second node and so on The numbers lines of an RGB node can be calculated with the follow ing formula of node 17 x index 17 x index index 1 R G B indices range from zero 0 to 16 Example for the node 768 384 192 177 x 12 17 x 6 3 1 3574 In case a particular RGB value of an image s pixel is not directly de scribed through a node it has to be interpolated The RGB nodes can be placed in a spatial graph cube Any input RGB value will be de scribed by a set of surrounding RGB nodes Undefined example 768 448 256 832 448 256 input value 800 420 220 768 448 192 832 448 192 B 768 384 256 832 384 256 R 768 384 192 832 384 192 Figure A 1 Surrounding RGB nodes of an undefined input value With the known look up output values of these eight RGB nodes the required R G B value can be calculated int
87. 4 050 KB E Hollywood o0002 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File 3 Hollywood 00003 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File proecll 04 SB Hollywood 00004 yu 4 050 KB YUV File project os 5 Hollywood 00005 yuv 4 050KB YUV File E Hollywood 00006 yuv 4 050KB YUV File E Hollywood 00007 yuv 4 050KB YUV File project_06 E Hollywood 00008 yuv 4 050KB YUV File project_07 E Hollywood 00009 yuv 4 050KB YUV File project_08 E Hollywood 00010 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File project_09 S Hollywood 00011 yuv 4 050KB YUV File O project_10 E Hollywood 00012 yuv 4 050KB YUV File S project_11 B Hollywood 00013 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File Al i Figure 4 7 Drag and drop of clip to bin 4 7 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 8 You may select more than one directory e g with the Ctrl i key pressed and drag them to the contents area of the bin The respective clips will all be added to the bin With video if you select another file than the first frame file in a video directory the scrub bar cursor of the thumbnail a pos sible clip s inpoint will be set accordingly With this procedure folders in the folder area may be created automatically representing the directory structure on the stor age Then the clips will already be sorted into the respective folders This behavior can be configured with the Configura tion Tool of the DVS software see the Fuze Configurations user guide
88. 5 6 5 7 aeo E E T 8 21 for menu options eee 2 8 l I O mode multi threaded 4 33 4 34 4 42 single threaded 4 33 4 34 I O TOO neccen 2 3 2 7 4 10 CON MENU sa descdeeiesadaxigenecuasessseeueaas 8 2 import Dit cessisse satini reni drcsbuisieeestans 8 14 default configuration load 8 19 effects Seattle Geet 4 28 global settings ee 8 19 PFOJOCE sttvczscavecctutcned Meseavezecteests 8 5 important MOLES nccccesaccstsseseiiiatensssas 1 7 information clip duration 0 00 6 55 6 63 clip inpoint 22edensecrestieic 6 54 6 62 clip outpoint ccsaceseinaniades 6 55 6 63 name of clip oeenn 6 55 6 63 project file 2 8 timeline duration siivececevctessiedentees 2 8 via tooltips n s 6 9 6 55 video raster eseese 2 8 information file 3 15 4 33 4 37 NpOINt aceasta dccscetesacaacta ees uecteees A 3 Change seien 6 43 delete 000 6 28 6 29 6 30 handler siiin icsse 6 43 handler trimming ccecce 6 45 information ccc 6 54 6 62 setting for timeline 6 28 6 29 setting in bin casesesesteteicass 3 6 4 20 setting in timeline 3 11 6 43 slave mode control een 5 14 inpoint entry field 6 28 PVs Index insert mode 08 3 8 6 30 6 35 of storage edicts eect eee 4 13 with attached clips 6 50 6 51 locking tracks 62s ie Acecsesearsesteeen eee 6 32 insert project cecce 8 5 logfiles Internal cccccccceceec
89. 6 VIJE CIP a scchorvecsnanesccegaiquads 6 54 A 5 size manual setting 6 7 see also video view buttons bin ecese 4 4 4 5 alpha channel 0 6 57 6 61 view of timeline e 6 25 attach to audio 6 49 6 55 6 64 virtual source timecode 2 13 6 10 properties 3 6 4 21 6 56 7 1 exporting EDL lecce 8 9 7 10 VOUE eee oer er ee eon E 1 1 SOUICE oo ec eececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 53 6 58 control line oo eee ec cece eee ees 6 65 thumbnail sosice2evescseseteianiceaceds 4 10 control point s 6 65 video drive ssisisrersisrsicrivdssnenisniriniia 1 7 VTR scesteiesdecdcetaceteersvaneecttas 5 11 A 5 video format VIR meline szscteaiccccrozinecteceacadieouns A 5 see output format video overlay ccecce 5 2 w alpha channel n n 6 57 6 61 aspect ratio sseeeeseeeees 5 2 6 13 warning message ccccccecceseeseees 4 13 current job e E a aa Ea 4 29 waveform video scope RISET 5 7 maximize enlarge n 5 2 waveform display cscceceeeees 6 66 safety areas scecssseeeeeeseneeees 5 2 web service s s s 8 20 S ZE heso erar Een ERE EEEn a Eat 5 3 Windows video raster 3 7 3 10 5 2 6 11 file manager c cccseeeee 3 4 4 7 default cvccccceceeissececscevsscoveusiess 6 13 Shortcuts ccccccccccecececcecs 3 2 A 6 Pili aeea 6 13 wipe A 3 7ses 3 13 7 7 Information sessen 2 8 Crossfade ett tase css sccatcatsersienteceee 7 7 video SCOPE ccecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 5
90. 6 Configuring the Video and Audio Output To output video and audio and to view your project s timeline with a monitor connected to the DVS system you have to configure the out put format of the timeline accordingly Both the video and audio out put can be configured freely How to Configure the Video Output With the button SETTINGS at the top left side of the EEES timeline area you can determine the output format video raster of the project Additionally you can find here various oth er settings concerned with the timeline or its output In the Edit Tool you can set different video format settings either for the SDI or the DVI and analog outputs Once set the respective format s will be automatically applied to the output ports of the DVS system By default the DVI analog output settings are linked to the video output format of the SDI and if not configured otherwise will be set to the same raster and it may have an effect on the images displayed there e g they may get cropped You can use the video overlay to see the effects immediately because it will always show the exact content of the outgoing signal ii The selected SDI output raster is applied to the video overlay S After pressing the button SETTINGS the following window will be dis played on the screen Fuze Edit Tool User Guide 6 12 Timeline output settings Name Timeline1 Qutput DVIVAnalog Format ror pare SD HD F
91. Action Cut selected elements to the clip Ctrl X board Paste from clipboard to the selected Ctrl V position location Open Windows Explorer Windows 9 El Open Task Manager Ctrl Alt Del Switch to Windows desktop Windows 24 D Switch to another program Alt TAB PVs Appendix A 3 Supported File Formats The DVS software supports over 100 graphic and image file formats Most are made available by a special library For a list of all these file formats see http www xnview com en formats html The tables in the following list the file formats that are supported by the DVS software directly Some are video or audio only file formats and some are container file formats that contain audio as well as video They are listed accordingly in this section e Some of the file formats i a may belong to optional packages o may not be real time capable a cannot be captured e g mov Video only File Formats o may require the installation of third party programs The following video only file formats still image formats are support ed by the DVS software Format Default File storage ee Description Name Extension format BMP bmp 3 x 8 bit RGB and 8 bit RGB file format with or without key 4 x 8 bit RGBA Windows bitmap format Only uncompressed bitmaps are supported no RLE compression Cineon1 cin 3 x 10 bit RGB 1
92. Clips on page 6 51 Prerender If a timeline element needs to be prerendered you can start the prerendering process with this menu option Further information about this can be found in section Prerendering of Timeline Ele ments on page 6 41 Delete prerendering When a timeline element is already prerendered you can delete its prerendered files with this menu option see also section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 41 Export to application When a clip is present in a video track of the time line area you can process its source material with a third party application of your choice either by using the original data directly destructive export or by previously copying the material beforehand Afterwards it will be provided again in the DVS software for further usage More information about this can be found in section Processing the Source Material of a Timeline Element on page 6 58 Select all With this menu option all clips in the timeline area can be selected in one step Further information about how to select clips in the timeline can be found in section Selecting Clips on page 6 36 Cut Copy Paste Using these menu options timeline elements can be cut or copied to the clipboard of the operating system and afterwards pasted again at the loca tion of your choice Further information about this can be found in section Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips
93. Ctrl F12 Configuration project Configuration defaults Load configuration defaults Save configuration defaults X WEB service enable Figure 8 10 The Options menu They will be described in the following sections 8 5 1 Driver connect Because the DVS system is based on an open platform other programs than the DVS software may want to access the video board of the sys tem To make this possible even with the DVS software running the menu option Driver connect was implemented When the driver of the video board is connected to the software the check box in front of this menu option is activated If the driver is dis connected and free to be used by other programs the check box is de activated If the driver is not in use by another program a simple play out i operation of the timeline in the DVS software will connect the driver to the DVS software again automatically 8 5 2 Configuration project The Configuration Tool provides overall two configuration groupings You can define project related settings in a project grouping tab Project or you can configure default settings that will be used for the DVS system in general as well as for each new project tab Defaults 8 17 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs see section Configuration defaults on page 8 18 While the first one includes settings that will be used for the currently active project only and stored tog
94. Edit Tool The individual en tries show the positions of the markers in the timeline and provide fur ther details if available Column Description Nr Number of the marker in the timeline Action In Shows the actual position of the marker or in terms of a timeline stretch indicated by the marker its Action Inpoint It is displayed either in timecode or in frames notation depending on the selected notation for the Edit Tool see section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 14 The Tool Area Column Description Action Out Shows the end of the timeline stretch indicated by the marker see Action In Action Dur Shows the duration of the timeline stretch indi cated by the marker see Action In Name In the fields of this column you can enter a cus tomized name for the marker The number of characters is not limited and all characters are allowed Marker Type Indicates the type of the marker Further infor mation about the available types can be found in section Marking Positions in the Timeline on page 6 47 Comment Same as the column Name but used for com ments about this marker For some markers comment entries will be automatically generat ed by the Edit Tool However they can be easily changed and adapted afterwards Thumbnail This column shows a preview of the frame where the marker is positioned in the timeline as a
95. FOSCE ooo ccceceececeeceeeececseteeeeeeeeeeees 7 4 timeline marker 4 30 4 34 4 38 4 39 6 47 add automatically 6 48 add manually lc 6 48 configuration s es 6 47 delete naan e aa 6 49 MOVING tO ccce 5 12 6 47 POSION ncicedtateseteencoretetseeed 4 30 BOM E AE 4 31 table e ane a ee ee ee 4 30 thumbnail ee ceeeeeeeeeeee eee 4 31 UPES ariora 6 47 Timeline output TC ociescieseccssnsaineces 6 70 timeline scale o n 6 25 configuration seese 6 8 title bar BiTi siiaisishacanatiniseoints 4 3 4 4 4 15 context menu bin 0 0 0 eee 4 4 effects FANE siscsnievererecsssninsgatds 4 28 title safety areas eessen 5 2 tool area seccceerrererererrereen 2 6 4 1 change size ccecce 4 2 RAIN oes Sete E E 4 1 TOOS sesecasatocncaeletaietesisieee ete 4 1 tools and services secesussiesiiceedaseeddends 2 4 defragmentation 2 4 A 20 tooltip sesintse2ee2 2 6 9 6 55 6 63 6 64 configuration eieeeeeeeeeee 6 9 keyframing ceecee 7 29 track LOCK e E T 6 32 MUTE sepie eatcsteastoeetcectedesesececee 6 32 NAME chiguicedi eee earaeiciaiaets 6 24 track buttons n 3 10 6 32 ACG SIZE waitiee A tech ccnattorsatesrentaeceaws 6 6 manual setting ccce 6 7 OptIONS nnssssssssssssnnnrrrrrrrrrrrreeeee 6 6 transition o ae 3 13 A 4 automatic creation 3 14 6 32 6 40 change length ocen 6 44 6 45 delete ccecce 3 14 duration ocer 3 14 7 3 ending point a cecencreaextnrs elastance 7 9 N EDU ir
96. Figure 6 44 Two selected outpoint handlers The following two trimming techniques are called slip and slide trim ming These are two sophisticated trimming techniques which can be used for a frame accurate moving of in and outpoints of clips while maintaining the length and duration of the timeline Slide trimming When you select one out and one inpoint handler thereby enclosing another clip you can change the out and inpoint of the two clips while the enclosed clip is fully maintained in its length as well as in its contents This way you can alter the position of the enclosed clip while the timeline length remains constant Figure 6 45 Enclosing a clip by selecting in outpoint handlers of neighboring clips Slip trimming When you select the in and outpoint handlers of a single clip you can change its in and outpoint simultaneously This will change the contents of the clip only The length of the clip its position and the length of the timeline is preserved PVs The Timeline Figure 6 46 Changing the contents of a clip 6 4 11 Marking Positions in the Timeline To mark certain positions in the timeline e g to remind you to cut the clip at this position or other reasons you can place timeline markers in the timeline of the Edit Tool timeline marker Figure 6 47 Timeline marker in timeline Once one or more markers are placed in the timeline you can easily jump to them with the re
97. Hz frequency receives a 30 Hz timecode This will result in a doubling of the timecode numbers 60 Hz 30 Hz TC 60 Hz 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 03 00 29 00 58 00 29 00 59 Basics 60 Hz 30 Hz TC 60 Hz 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 01 At even higher frame rates e g 90 Hz the timecode numbers will be tripled quadrupled etc making a timecode handling of all common frequencies possible Entering Timecode When entering timecode in one of the software s position or length in dicators you may omit digits if you enter less information the entered timecode will be interpreted from right to left the last number is the frame the next the seconds etc Every digit omitted between the co lons is assumed to be a leading zero You may also omit the separators colons However then you should observe that no digits are left out With omitted separators the entered timecode will be interpreted from right to left the last two numbers in dicate the frame the next two the seconds etc After pressing Enter on your keyboard the entered timecode is accept ed in the respective timecode field for example to move to a certain position Examples 1 9 jumps to 1 sec frame 9 00 00 01 09 109 jumps to 1 sec frame 9 00 00 01 09 247 jumps to 2 sec frame 47 00 00 03 23 if raster is in 24p Additio
98. Modify all Reset Figure 7 2 General items of the properties area If available and not dimmed they can be used together with this time line element In detail they perform the following With the Dur field you can change the length of the selected timeline element frame accurately Simply type in the desired length duration of the timeline element and confirm your entry with the Enter key After this the outpoint of the selected element in the timeline will be altered and it will take on the adjusted length Whether the material succeeding the timeline element in the timeline will be preserved and moved accordingly depends on the state of the insert overwrite mode of the Edit Tool see section Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 30 Further information about timecode frame number entry fields can be found in section About Timecode Frame Num ber Fields on page 2 14 This button applies the settings of the currently se lected timeline element or with video clips of the currently selected and displayed effects operator to all elements of the same type that precede it in this track of the timeline 7 3 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 4 Modify after Modify all The button MODIFY AFTER applies the settings of the currently selected timeline element or with video clips of the currently selected and displayed effects operator to all elements of the same type that succeed
99. VvV A Rohde amp Schwarz Company Workstation Software Fuze Edit Tool User Guide Fuze Edit Tool User Guide Introduction Basics Getting Started The Tool Area The Control Area The Timeline Timeline Element Properties The Menus Appendix Index User Guide Version 3 7 for the Fuze Edit Tool Version 3 7 Copyright 2008 2011 by DVS Digital Video Systems GmbH a Rohde amp Schwarz company Ha nover All rights reserved The manuals as well as the soft and or hardware described here and all their constituent parts are protected by copyright Without the express permission of DVS Digital Video Systems GmbH any form of use which goes beyond the narrow bounds prescribed by copyright legislation is prohibited and liable to prosecution This particularly applies to duplication copying translation processing evaluation publishing and storing and or processing in an electronic system Specifications and data may change without notice We offer no guarantee that this documentation is correct and or complete In no event shall DVS Digital Video Systems GmbH be liable for any damages whatsoever including without limitation any special indirect or consequential damages and damages resulting from loss of use data or profits or business interruption arising out of the use of or inability to use the hardware software and or manual materials Those parts of this documentation that describe optional softw
100. You can also click on a posi tion outside the visible timeline area on the scrub bar directly to move the cursor and the visible part of the timeline there immediately Additionally with a mouse click directly below or above the part of the scrub bar in light grey you can position the scrub bar cursor there in stantly PVs The Control Area 5 4 Controls At the bottom of the control area the controls to play out and move within your current project are located Frames The SLAVE button activates the slave mode of the Edit Tool With the slave mode the DVS system can be controlled via RS 422 from another workstation e g a VTR or a digital disk recorder such as the Pronto4 by DVS Then it will behave like a VTR by using preroll postroll etc The specifications of these parameters can be found in section Slave Mode RS 422 Control on page A 19 When the slave mode is activated the slave mode control window will be displayed on the screen see section The Slave Mode Control Window on page 5 14 To clear the software from the slave mode press the button CLOSE of the window Slave mode This button toggles between the frames or fields display mode In its deactivated state the frames of a video clip are displayed when stepping one frame field backward or forward in the timeline When activated its fields will be displayed With these buttons you can step one frame field for or backward in you
101. ad written at the same time Figure 4 22 Chart of performance monitor individual file I O duration At the top left of the chart you can find the last measured access time It details in certain intervals during operation the measured access time in milliseconds i e the value of one bar in the chart At the top right of the chart you can find an indication about how many frames were processed total and how many drops occurred during this time When operating the access times are displayed via blue bars in the chart If bars reach the top line during an operation it may indicate dif ficulties during the loading of particular files However clips of a higher resolution usually require more time to access especially when transi tions are applied to the timeline Then high bars do not necessarily mean that a drop may occur soon Drops are detected by the real time core of the DVS system and they will be displayed as bars in red that are cut at the top 4 6 2 Chart Controls 4 36 With the chart controls you can control the appearance of the chart or create a proprietary DVS information file The chart controls provide the following items If the controls appear dimmed the performance monitor is dis i abled To use it you have to enable it first This can be done with the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide for more information Currently this button provides no functional
102. ailable as soon as drops are displayed in the drop table and the real time operation is finished 4 6 6 Using the Performance Monitor 4 40 The performance monitor monitors the hard disk accesses of the DVS software to the video data With it you can verify for example the sta tus of the hard disks of the storage array as well as of certain files on the array Individual frames missing in an image sequence clip i e im i age files that are not present on the storage at all are not reg istered as drops You can check the consistency of your material added to the bin with the menu option Check Bin on the Bin menu see section Check Bin on page 8 15 and sec tion Consistencies of Clips on page 6 57 This section will explain shortly how to use the performance monitor First it will be described how to prepare the monitor and the DVS soft ware for the measuring of the system s workload After that follows a description of how to perform the actual test with a play out operation Although the following describes how to use the performance i monitor during a play out of video data it can also be used during a record operation Then it will measure the workload when writing files to the storage instead of reading them A re cord can be performed with the I O Tool for further informa tion see the Fuze I O Tool user guide Preparing the Software and the Performance Monitor This section explai
103. al frames The clips show positions according to an in ternal frame count This setting also acti vates the frame notation for the Edit Tool see section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 14 Internal timeco de The clips show positions according to an in ternal timecode count This setting also acti vates the timecode notation for the Edit Tool see section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 14 Source TC The clips show positions according to the timecodes provided by their file headers and set either via the Configuration Tool or the clip s properties If the clips do not provide a source timecode of their own no timecodes will be displayed by the clips However they can be configured to show a virtual source timecode via their properties in the bin Fur ther information about source timecode can be found in section Notes on Source Time code and Keycode on page 2 12 This set ting also activates the timecode notation for the Edit Tool see section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 14 File number The clips show positions according to the numbers of their respective image files e g the image Hollywood00231 dpx as the starting point of a clip will be shown with 231 This setting also activates the frame notation for the Edit Tool see section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 14 Dvs The Timeline 6 2
104. al up to 2K in RGB 12 bit in real time If you want to process material of for example a higher bit depth the real time capability of the system cannot be ensured The real time capability of the DVS system depends on various factors such as frame size play out frequency location of the clip on the stor age etc When adding a clip to the bin it will be checked whether its location and or file format are real time capable Additional checks will be performed when adding clips to the i timeline If any exceed the real time capability of the DVS sys tem they will be subject to a prerendering see section Pre rendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 41 Clips that may cause trouble because of their location and or file format invoke a warning message when added to the bin Then the clip will be visibly marked in the contents area of the bin In the thumbnail view a warning icon will be superimposed on the thumbnail and the respective text information that is the cause for this warning will be colored in yel low This behavior i e the warning message as well as the marking i of a clip in the contents area of the bin can be configured with the setting Warn if base directory mismatch group Gener al in the Configuration Tool of the DVS software see Fuze Configurations user guide for more details File format File path marked clip feo epth 8 bits Pianini Colormode Vite Frame
105. ansition appears between the two clips by default set to a Cross fade wipe PVs The Timeline oO p Ke transition fa Figure 6 37 Transition between clips The exact position of the transition depends on the available head and tail If head and tail are sufficiently available for both clips the transition will be positioned exactly in the middle of the timeline cursor The transition is now added to the timeline and you can proceed for instance by calling up its properties and altering them to adjust the transition to your needs How to do this and the individual items avail able to change a transition are described in chapter Timeline Element Properties on page 7 1 You can delete a transition the same way you delete a clip from i the timeline Simply select its visual representation in the time line and press the key Del on your keyboard or select from its context menu the menu option Delete Depending on the resolution of the material and the type of operators used in the timeline it may be necessary to prerender the transition see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 41 6 4 8 Prerendering of Timeline Elements When adding timeline elements such as clips or operators to the time line they are immediately tested for their real time capability which de pends on various factors such as frame size play out frequency location of the clip on the
106. ardless of their setting S If the audio clip in the timeline is in stereo and the audio track is configured to mono the clip will be downmixed by the Edit Tool On all selected channels you will receive the same signal Output Audio Clip Audio Track Channel A Channel B Stereo Mono Mono of stereo Mono of stereo clip clip If the audio clip in the timeline is in stereo and the audio track is configured to stereo the output will depend on the state of the button i e whether the channels are configured as stereo or mono channels When the channels are set to mono a mono signal Fuze Edit Tool User Guide Dvs of the downmixed stereo clip will be provided If the channels are set to stereo a standard stereo signal will be output Output Audio Clip Audio Track Button Channel A Channel B Stereo Stereo Mono Mono of Mono of button stereo clip stereo clip deactivated Stereo Stereo Stereo Channel 1 Channel 2 button left of right of activated stereo clip stereo clip Once the settings for the respective track are set confirm and activate them with the button OK of the audio track properties window Audio will be given out via AES EBU and embedded in the vid i eo signal simultaneously Via the SETTINGS button in the timeline area of the Edit Tool see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6
107. are confirmed When time stretched the clip will be lengthened in the timeline outpoint of the clip moves to the right when time com pressed the clip will be shortened outpoint moves to the left If the check box is deactivated the length of the timeline element in the time line will be preserved meaning when time stretched the outpoint of the clip will be trimmed back and when time compressed the possible alteration depends on the available tail of this clip without tail a time compression will not be possible The configured time stretching or time compression will be in effect for the clip in the timeline as soon as it is confirmed with the OK button The button CANCEL closes the window without altering the settings Time stretching or time compression can also be performed directly in the timeline This may be helpful when adjusting clips to a specific length in the timeline for example to fit inbetween two other clips For this the Time stretching mode menu option on the context menu of The Timeline a clip has to be activated check box in front of menu option activated Then all alterations to the clip s in or outpoint in the timeline see sec tion Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Elements on page 6 43 will be a time stretching or time compression and the values in the time stretching or time compression window will be altered au tomatically With this the clip and its in and outpoint can be easily
108. are or hardware features usually contain a corresponding note Anyway a lack of this note does not mean any commitment from DVS Digital Video Systems GmbH DVS and Spycer are registered trademarks of DVS Digital Video Systems GmbH Adobe and Pho toshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Apple Final Cut Pro and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Avid is a trademark or registered trademark of Avid Tech nology Inc or its subsidiaries in the United States and or other countries Kodak and Cineon are trademarks of Eastman Kodak Company IRIX and SGI are registered trademarks of Silicon Graph ics Inc Windows the Windows logo and Windows Media are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Any other product names mentioned in this documentation may be trademarks or registered trade marks of their respective owners and as such are subject to the usual statutory provisions PVs Headquarters DVS Digital Video Systems GmbH Krepenstr 8 30165 Hannover GERMANY Phone 49 511 67807 0 Fax 49 511 630070 E mail info dvs de Internet http www dvs de Support Phone 49 511 67807 125 Fax 49 511 371985 E mail support dvs de For the Americas U S Headquarters DVS Digital Video Inc 300 East Magnolia Boulevard Suite 10
109. are provided top left Usually the exact inpoint of the clip on the timeline This value and its notation depend on the i display setting for the timeline timeco de frame notation see section Configur ing the Timeline Scale on page 6 8 and the display type setting of the timeline see section Changing the Display Type on page 6 9 6 54 The Timeline top right bottom left bottom right S Usually the exact outpoint of the last frame of the clip on the timeline This value and its notation depend on the i display setting for the timeline timeco de frame notation see section Configur ing the Timeline Scale on page 6 8 and the display type setting of the timeline see section Changing the Display Type on page 6 9 Name of the clip as it is available in the bin together with its folder path Length duration of the clip tooltips which can be customized to your individual needs see i You can receive additional information about the clips via their section Configuring the Tooltips of Clips on page 6 9 for fur ther information 6 5 2 The Context Menu of Video Clips The context menu of video clips usually invoked with a right click of the mouse provides the following menu options and functions that can be used with video clips Delete This menu option deletes the respective clip where the context menu was invoked from the timeline Altern
110. art The Start entry field indicates in percent the starting point of the transition If adjusted the operator will begin the transition at a later point of its phases to blend into the receding image If this value is greater than the value set in the End entry field the transi tion effect will be reversed i e a change will appear towards the increasing black area see graphics in figure 7 4 on page 7 8 This button transfers the value set in the End entry field to the Start entry field from right to left A A 4 i v This button exchanges the values between the End and Start entry fields The value of the End entry field will be transferred to the Start entry field and vice versa With this button you can transfer the value set in the Start entry field to the End entry field from left to right End The End entry field indicates in percent the ending point of the transition If adjusted the operator will conclude the transition at an earlier point of its phas es to blend into the receding image If this value is less than the value set in the Start entry field the transition effect will be reversed i e a change will appear towards the increasing black area see graphics in figure 7 4 on page 7 8 As soon as an item of the transition properties is altered its effect is im mediately applied to the selected transition between two clips Once the transition properties are set you can for
111. art process 6 42 6 56 8 11 preset effect a u 4 23 4 26 7 14 R apply decks arteries 4 25 7 15 realtime create oo eee ee ec ee eee eeeeees 4 23 7 15 capability of clips 2 9 4 13 4 42 delete essere eee tenteeetntes 4 27 ONG aeea a S 4 34 EXPONE wesissenidrec sede winast ieser 4 27 operation 2 9 2 11 4 13 4 32 DADO sess cessed cei cececiaceehecenestats 4 28 4 42 5 2 OAC ernennen 4 28 7 15 performance steak 1 7 4 32 4 40 Religie sete soe et 4 26 WANING acssincscrearaietsees statist 4 13 SAVE earisenne er ararananewaa ns 4 27 TTD Pacer files accenn 8 4 SONE ororo a 4 28 record previous cutting point 5 12 performance ns 4 40 primary color correction resolving drops n 4 44 setting of static LUT 7 10 7 30 tedo aoceeceseessessessteseesetstsseseesetesees 8 13 priority vertical editing 6 59 reel program exit pesaeanenennent 3 15 8 2 8 12 name for output 00 6 71 program icon Menu szcc2eecdeetscerzicers 8 2 reference number keycode 2 13 program start 2 sess 3 2 relinking clips 6 53 6 56 6 64 progress Of JOD siirre 4 29 remove WACK nn 6 57 6 64 project renaming preset effects 006 4 26 archive ceeeeeeeneeeenentenenseteneetene 8 11 report drops sesescesee 3 2 4 33 4 39 configuration ecce 8 17 resetting timeline element properties 7 4 EXPONE AS sissssssissrieerieenrerieeenenns 8 7 resizing of material c
112. at tached clips Sometimes during your editing work you may want to group audio and video clips for example if they are already perfectly aligned and in synchronization For this the timeline provides the possibility to attach audio to video clips Fur ther information about how to work with at tached clips and how to use these menu options can be found in section Attaching Audio Clips to Video Clips on page 6 49 Enable tooltip Clips added to the timeline provide various infor mation via tooltips With this menu option you can activate or deactivate the display of the tool tips when the mouse cursor is placed over a clip in the timeline area If it is activated the menu op tion will show a cross in front Additional informa tion about tooltips can be found in section Configuring the Tooltips of Clips on page 6 9 Select all With this menu option all clips in the timeline area can be selected in one step Further information about how to select clips in the timeline can be found in section Selecting Clips on page 6 36 Cut Copy Paste Using these menu options timeline elements can be cut or copied to the clipboard of the operating system and afterwards pasted again at the loca tion of your choice Further information about this can be found in section Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips on page 4 18 Relink clip Once a clip is available in the timeline it can be relinked i e re
113. atively you can select the clip and press the Del key on your keyboard Attach Disconnect element Disconnect group Disconnect timeline These menu options enable you to work with at tached clips Sometimes during your editing work you may want to group audio and video clips for example if they are already perfectly aligned and in synchronization For this the timeline provides the possibility to attach audio to video clips Fur ther information about how to work with at tached clips and how to use these menu options can be found in section Attaching Audio Clips to Video Clips on page 6 49 Enable tooltip Clips added to the timeline provide various infor mation via tooltips With this menu option you can activate or deactivate the display of the tool tips when the mouse cursor is placed over a clip in the timeline area If it is activated the menu op tion will show a cross in front Additional informa tion about tooltips can be found in section Configuring the Tooltips of Clips on page 6 9 6 55 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 56 Time stretching Time stretching mode Video and audio clips added to the timeline can be time stretched or time compressed to speed up or slow down the play out of a clip for example for slow or fast motion purposes Further information about these menu options can be found in section Time Stretching or Time Compression of
114. audio and video sepa rately Both will automatically be included in the created file 6 71 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide 6 72 x Video output x Hardware finalize support File format Bitmap F Options 8 bit BGR Files perfolder Q Limited to Unlimited Format SD HD Film Other n G 1 1920 x 1080 4 SMPTE 274 A ait olu Matrix SMPTE 274 tange Head range Full Timeline TC Offset 00 00 00 00 TC Drop frame Pulldown Startphase Resolution 192 me x 108 Frame rate 2 prog Dominance Even fields gt SMPTE 274 Aspect ratio 1 3 x cat 5 24 SMPTE 27 Figure 6 61 Configuring video To the right of the check box Video output you can find the Hardware finalize support check box With it you activate or deactivate the sup port of the DVS PCI video board during finalizing When activated and if possible the video files will be rendered in hardware in a render speed faster than real time depends on the applied operators and video for mats involved All real time effects are supported When deactivated the finalizing will be made in software When finalizing to QuickTime the available file types depend i on whether the Hardware finalize support check box is acti vated or deactivated 2K resolutions or above are supported when the File type combo box is not set to QuickTime Conversion With the File format combo box select the file format for your clip t
115. bin as well Now two clips are available in the Edit Tool and you can start working with them With the scrub bar below the thumbnails visible when a clip is selected you can preview the material and roughly select an inpoint for the respec tive clip However for our demonstration here we will leave the clips inpoints as they are iJ A When audio should be used in your project you have to drag add audio clips to the bin as well If you select another file than the first frame file in a video di rectory the scrub bar cursor of the thumbnail the clip s in point will be set accordingly You may select more than one video directory in the file man ager and drag them to the contents area of the bin The respec tive clips will all be added to the bin You can also add clips to the bin by using the menu option Add clip on the context menu of the contents area or the menu Project Add clip Via the context menu of a clip in the bin either audio or video you can call up the clip s properties Most of these can only be altered if the clip is not already present in the timeline When adding clips to the bin with a procedure other than a record some properties may not be discerned properly due to missing file header information Then they will either be de duced from the file format color space etc of the clip or configured to the currently set timeline output settings If the properties of the clip do
116. box Audio output has to be activated With the finalizing function of the Edit Tool you are able to generate video and audio together or separately if desired Simply select the ap propriate output check box see also section Configuring Video on page 6 71 If a container format is selected as the file format e g Win i dows Media you cannot generate audio and video sepa rately Both will automatically be included in the created file _ Audio output Channels File format Bit depth Render audio in Audio auto retiming 6 75 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 76 With the File format combo box select the file format of your audio file s to be generated For a list of the supported file formats see sec tion Supported File Formats on page A 9 To the right of the File for mat combo box you can find the button OPTIONS which provides depending on the selected format further configurations for the files to be generated From the Bit depth combo box select the bit depth of the audio files The DVS software supports all common bit depths depending on the selected file format Use the Render audio in combo box to determine the output format of your files i e whether they should be rendered to individual mono or stereo files or a single file containing multiple channels depending on the selected file format Audio that is available in the timeline can be re timed i e time stretched or time
117. c 4 33 4 38 DVS information file 3 15 4 33 4 37 MISSING frame 2csissce sce 4 34 4 35 reset counter cceeceeeeeeeeees 4 37 resolving dropS sis ues ssesdeceeiciss 4 43 result file isesi 4 39 rela A A E E E E 4 42 status messages 4 33 4 37 table controls 4 33 4 39 timeline marker 4 38 4 39 6 47 PVs Index NN SO sonniger 4 40 project management 05 2 11 pillarboxing 22s danced siveetceetcaintnten 6 20 properties placeholder for missing frame 4 35 6 57 accessing 4 21 6 56 6 64 7 2 play out 2 9 5 12 5 15 6 27 CIOSUNE gecsaiagei pisandsasateiaiatensaaads 7 6 connecting the driver 8 17 of clips 3 6 4 21 6 56 6 64 I TOV CVSS siaptcancatvecsetintasmnacnadsy 5 11 of timeline elements 0 7 1 performance u n 4 40 4 42 of transitions sses 7 7 position of play out 06 5 15 of video clips n se 7 10 resolving drops sien cciescssussceeezecs 4 43 protocol RS 422 5 14 A 1 A 3 position DIOR eect eetesd eet ES 2 9 of clip lt eciveeks 3 8 6 2 6 3 6 46 data location cecce 2 11 prerendering ssiiiiieeeeeee 2 9 6 41 DUNG OWI sec var ccarsecean tent Hetesticccenetes 6 74 color scheme clips 6 42 data location ccce 2 11 Q delete temporary data 4 29 6 43 6 56 A 22 QuickTime finalizing sessicepeceeteceuses 6 72 prOgreSS acre cacesaierarcenmescensasets 4 29 st
118. calculated extra files rendered im ages in a location for temporary data on the main storage These prox ies are then used for a play out instead of the original material in the timeline For example when using a type of clip that exceeds the real time ca pability of your DVS system it will be marked visibly in the timeline In order to play it out in real time you will have to prerender it beforehand and it will be rendered in the format that is currently set as the video output format The prerendered proxies carry project specific file names and are generated and administered by the Edit Tool automatically The links to prerendered proxies will be stored in the project file and when opening the project later again it will not be necessary to render them anew When working with prerendered data you may get proxies on the stor age that are no longer required for your current project but occupying disk space This will happen for example as soon as a timeline element was prerendered and afterwards deleted or changed Even a switching of the video format will make the already prerendered data obsolete due to the fact that the extra images may no longer coincide with the newly selected format Because the software can never be sure when proxies are truly obsolete for a project they will remain on the storage of your system Nevertheless to delete prerendered data you can use 2 9 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs the menu opti
119. cannot be set By activating the Unlimited setting no further subdirectories will be created and the rendered files will all be stored in the first generated subdirectory as described below Windows may cause problems if more than 20 000 files are stored in one directory Use the Unlimited setting only when you are sure that your rendering causes less than 20 000 frames 6 77 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 78 With the files per folder items set to 20 000 our examples given in sec tion Configuring Video on page 6 71 and section Configuring Au dio on page 6 75 would lead to the following output on the storage when as the video output format the dpx file format were selected and for audio the wav file format tempest L act05 scenedl Clip L Clip 0000 Clip 0000000 dpx Clip 0000001 dpx CLID ss x Clip _0019999 dpx Clip_ lt Channels gt 0 wav L Clip 0001 Clip 0020000 dpx Clip 0020001 dpx Clip Clip_ lt Channels gt 1 wav m Clip SequenceInfo xml In the path V tempest act05 scene01 a directory will be creat ed carrying the name Clip Beneath it a subdirectory will be created with the name Clip 0000 In this subdirectory the first 20 000 frames of the finalizing will be stored The file name of the first frame of your rendered timeline will be Clip 0000000 dpx The number in the file name will increase by one with every generated f
120. ccccrcccen 1 6 l 4 default configuration ee 8 18 oreko EAE E ovat deacetaeeseees 8 19 SAVE Sardeiuveecediciacdete sruededeanceeeude 8 19 default video raster cacce 6 13 defragmentation tool 1 7 2 4 A 20 delete clip from bin neee 4 21 clip from timeline 3 10 6 55 6 63 effect from clip properties 7 13 7 14 elements range in timeline 6 38 folder bin o ae 4 16 from in to out ac 6 38 inconsistent clips ee 8 16 inpoint of timeline 6 28 6 29 6 30 outpoint of timeline 6 28 6 29 6 30 preset effect ccecce 4 27 temporary data prerender 4 29 6 43 6 56 A 22 timeline marker ccecce 6 49 transition ccccceeeee ee 3 14 6 41 volume control point 6 63 destructive export ice ccoscesciscveeedeants 6 58 digital cinema ccscessinescacceecceeccestecaces 1 6 disabling SDIT ooa 6 20 audio scrubbing ceecee 6 17 CrOpp Ng ussssssnnnsnnnirirrireeeessee 6 23 CINCCIS cckeccasceedassreatetinmsescecsants 7 13 gap rendering ccecce 6 70 OOPS seseesecpeeaiesaraeeiasetccanesas 6 9 disconnect attached clips 6 50 element ccce 6 51 SPOP cscecet seas narrare eN 6 51 timeline nccc 6 51 disk Space veierreiieissrnsyi aerarii 2 9 display type eneessssssssrrrirrnnnne 6 9 QOM NANCE sivisirigiciriitiarinicriririnei 6 74 driver sssesssesssrssssrrrsrrrssrrrrsrrrrrenne 2 2 CONNEC iiiaio earki 8 17 drop 4 32 4 33 4 35 4 36 4 38 A 2 during play out secc 4 43
121. ciecss eeu 6 13 TNO cscs te arsane 6 17 TUUOR ariris careia rininiame iiair 7 18 fiNaAlZINE sessir oran 6 68 SEU sepisan 6 73 audio output n s 6 75 autoscale n n 6 74 channels sasicilanieleciiexeigscdess 6 79 clipwise rendering 000 6 71 color conversion matrix 6 73 color space range ccce 6 73 create bin clip assctccecinscinnectvesstes 6 70 drop frame timecode 6 74 file format ee 6 72 6 76 THE TV DES oriire essinu 6 72 file frame numbering 6 69 6 79 files per folder 6 73 6 77 gap rendering ccce 6 70 hardware support n 6 72 name options scaninantosatecdeesetents 6 79 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide pulldown Sisecccse teers eet ee 6 74 QuickTime ssassn 6 72 resizing of material 6 74 resolution catcocextaictatucxtecneiecsane 6 74 CSUN riser ra 6 77 source timecode n 6 70 start AoeedetetsgetnencedacrtasGeadboecds 6 77 start index eee ene eee eee 6 82 storage of audio files 6 79 storage Of files aansien 6 69 storage of video files 6 77 video output ses iszeececvisasavedaecars 6 71 fine tuning mode n 3 8 6 35 folder noscere 3 3 4 3 4 14 copying clips coctteceostasnnannadstss 4 20 Greate exicidvtcoiictetesiacececste 4 8 4 15 delete sascececeencetieseseitaseneaeaete 4 16 FONG sorioininiisiis ror eoaro rina 4 15 OO aE teers eanreseeeeee ee 4 16 SOING sass acsnereedasetecadecenaessas 4 15 sort
122. cified in the video output settings Via the color space range settings you determine whether this value is given out in a restricted e g with a value of 16 setting Head or in a full value range with a value of O setting Full Further information about color space ranges and how to set them can be found in the Fuze Configura tions user guide 6 23 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 2 10 Naming Tracks 6 24 When working with a lot of timeline tracks each can be given a name of its own to distinguish between them more easily For this simply type in in the entry field right above the buttons a name You can give track names to all tracks available in the timeline area Adagio 4 R M Ritenuto 2 Rh Capo 3 R hl Figure 6 25 Example of audio track names Due to the fact that the area preceding each track will always be visible in the timeline area of the Edit Tool it may help you to identify individ ual tracks more easily Dvs The Timeline 6 3 Controlling the Timeline Most work is performed in the timeline of the Edit Tool directly In the timeline you can arrange the sequence of video clips cut the material or set transitions and other operators for the clips Furthermore you can play out the timeline either the whole timeline or a defined range of the timeline This section explains in detail how to control the timeline Among oth ers it will be explained how to move within the ti
123. ck box adds a list as comments below the generated EDL that maps the abbreviated reel tape names used in the EDL to their original names If no reel names are available the list will detail the path and file to the source material on the storage Add clip infor mation Adds further information as comments about the clips to the EDL Each clip will then detail its name as it can be seen in the timeline FROM CLIP NAME and the path and file to its source material on the storage FROM FILE 8 9 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs Overwrite tape Usually when generating a data list abbreviated names of bin names of the clips as they can be seen in the time clips line will be used as the reel tape name see for in stance section The Clip s Information on page 6 54 By selecting this check box you can enter a different reel name in the entry field Name Name Once the check box to overwrite the tape names is enabled this entry field will be available With it you can specify a different reel name for the clips in the data list It will be used for all clips present in the timeline You have to enter the reel name in the i correct notation of the EDL format that is selected with the combo box EDL For mat EDL Format Select from this combo box the EDL format that Effects With this combo box you determine whether transitions in the timeline should be retained in
124. ck of the mouse The starting point of a gap as well as its end are recognized by li the Edit Tool as cutting points Thus you can move frame ac curately to gaps easily via the control buttons that jump to cut ting points see section Controls on page 5 11 6 4 2 Selecting Clips 6 36 Individual clips Individual clips can be selected with a click of Clips can be selected or deselected in the timeline easily For this per form one of the following procedures or their combination Although the table below describes how to select clips only i most procedures can be used to deselect clips as well Some of the following procedures are restricted to their type of track i e restricted to either video or audio tracks the mouse on the respective clip Several clips Several clips can be selected disjointedly when clicking them while holding down the Ctrl key at the same time Dvs The Timeline Range of clips A range of adjoining clips can be selected by clicking one clip the starting clip and after wards holding down the Shift key while click ing the clip that marks the end of the range You can also select a range of clips by drawing a rectangle with the mouse over the clips that you want to select The starting point of the rectangle has to be on an empty part of the timeline track 01 06 500 n re mam II X Figure 6 35 Drawing a selection rectangle All
125. compressed between different frame rates e g 23 976 Hz 24 Hz and 25 Hz For this select from the Audio auto ret iming combo box the appropriate option When activated a retiming will be performed automatically during finalizing with respect to the frame rate of the selected video format However please note that this feature provides no pitch control and should therefore be used for slight timing changes only With the check boxes of the area Channels you have to select audio channels for the output The stereo channel check boxes of this area are directly related to the audio channel output settings of the timeline see section How to Configure the Audio Output on page 6 13 They will render whatever audio track is set to the respective output chan nels Example The audio track 5 and 6 of the Edit Tool contain each audio with dif ferent contents Both tracks are configured to an output of channel 1 and 2 In the Finalizing window select the channels 1 and 2 for an audio file generation This will result in an audio file that contains the mixed contents of the audio tracks 5 and 6 Audio track of Edit Tool 5 6 Output path of tracks channels 1 2 channels 1 2 Output settings in Finaliz channels 1 2 ing window Results in file containing the mixed a of audio track 5 and 6 PVs The Timeline 6 7 4 Finalizing The buttons at the bottom right hand side of the w
126. consistencies i e it is tested whether the first and the last frame of each clip is actually present on the storage With the help of the menu option Check Bin of the Bin menu i you can perform a more accurate testing of your bin see sec tion Check Bin on page 8 15 If the first and or last frame of a clip is missing you will be in formed about this the same way as described in section Check Bin on page 8 15 PVs The Menus 8 4 2 Export Bin You can export the bin of your currently active project with the menu option Export Bin It will save the contents of your bin including all folders and clips to an extra file The selection of this menu option opens a standard dialog window to save a file where you have to specify the storage path and file name to export the bin File extension cb Bin file Once the contents of the bin is saved you can import it into another project whenever you want see section Import Bin on page 8 14 8 4 3 Clear Bin The Clear Bin menu option on the menu Bin deletes all folders and clips from the bin of your current project The selection of this menu option calls up a warning message After the confirmation that you really want to delete the contents of the bin the bin will be cleared _ If your currently active bin was altered and not saved you will i be asked by the program whether you want to save its con tents to a bin file When you answe
127. csseeseesseee 6 74 extract TUNG eiessecezecaeteeeetosc ce 8 11 resizing timeline element 0 6 51 INSET ceccsceiteseesteaidcatesswudecesaecesds 8 5 resolution aean 6 11 6 74 management oer 2 11 tesult file ceecceccecsseeseeseessesseeseeseen 4 39 project a EET 8 3 8 4 retiMINg eeeecessecsesseseeseeeeseees 6 51 6 76 file MAME eo eeseeeeeeeeesenee teens 8 5 8 6 reverse Wipe siiis 7 9 INFOFMALION esses ees eeseeeeeeeeeeees 2 8 eVIOW vececcsessessesseesesseseesevesesseeee 3 14 PISCE sec sdet saat sear Cenevietanctantendcast 8 5 part of timeline cccseceeeeeee 5 12 MEW dratere ge ateiaisa Sid nia EEEE 8 3 RGB parade Beaten tendon cs 5 6 OPEN ineen T 8 4 toot folder bin o 4 16 Go 8 4 potation veecececscseessesesseeseseeseseeee 7 18 SAVE spirer ue a a 8 5 8 6 SEtt NgS cava ties asabiceceleasseneeae 7 20 status messages s es 2 8 RS 422 ee 5 11 A 4 A 19 l 9 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide 9 pin protocol 100 c sseie A 1 A 19 OdG UCS cscestvesidecccsdcseeusees A 3 A 19 protocol ssec 5 14 A 1 A 3 S safety areas ssseieieeererrrreerrerrrre 5 2 sat ratioN sisien ivanaa 5 5 save DiN eee eee meee eer er ere ae 8 15 default configuration 8 19 global settings ccc 8 20 preset effects ineen 4 27 project srcccseacciazavieens esis 8 5 8 6 scale of timeline see timeline scale scaling auto 6 3 10 6 12 6 75 screenshots cccghceigcsesxerecceenetsssiadseeces 1 6 lt 3 Reece ore
128. ct tab Default Further information about the two configuration groupings as i well as about the project related settings can be found in sec tion Configuration project on page 8 17 The Configuration defaults menu option enables you to configure and set up the system settings as well as the default values for each ini tialized new project It will open the Configuration Tool with the tab Defaults activated Then you can set up for example the TCP IP set tings of the DVS software as well as the period for the automatic save function of opened projects autosave The default configuration set tings are saved automatically together with the software when it is shut down The project related settings available on the Defaults tab will be used for each initialized new project For more information and a complete description of the Configuration Tool please consult the Fuze Configurations user guide PVs The Menus 8 5 4 Load configuration defaults With the menu option Load configuration defaults you can load configuration settings previously saved to a file as the new default set tings of the Configuration Tool see section Save configuration de faults on page 8 19 The selection of this menu option opens the standard dialog window for a file selection where you have to select the desired file that contains the default configuration settings File extension cf Configuration fi
129. ctive keys on your keyboard i e Backspace and Del MoDIFY This button will be available when a user de fined string variable Customized is dou ble clicked marked in the upper combo box Then you can edit the text of this string in the field Extension will be When fin ished the marked extension in the upper combo box can be replaced with be edited text by clicking the MODIFY button by double clicking them in the up _ per combo box and selecting anoth er one from the combo box Extension will be ii The other variables can be modified e Use the Numbering options to configure a file numbering for the image files to be created File number will be Select from this combo box what should be used to create the file numbers You can se lect between a consecutive numbering of frames the internal timecode of the Edit Tool or the timeline s output timecode When using one of the timecode settings the respective timecode will be recalculated in frames This value is then used for the numbering 6 87 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 82 Start index time When Frame number or Internal TCis code selected in the combo box File number will be you can enter in this field the starting point for the numbering i e with it you can offset the frame number in the file names of the image files It can be entered either in frames or timecode notation depending on the sel
130. d 8 11 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs The content frames to be copied is determined by the in and out points of the clips on the timeline With the Heads Tails entry field you can set the number of frames that should be copied in addition to these for later heads or tails adjustments When everything is set you can initiate the copying process with a click on the button OK Then the DVS high speed copying process will copy the files to the selected destination G To archive the whole project you have to save the project file as well Audio clips and clips in container file formats are copied as a whole Further information about the DVS high speed copying pro cess can be found in the Spycer user guide 8 2 13 Exit The menu option Exit ends the current Edit Tool session There is no way to end the Edit Tool alone When you exit the AN Edit Tool the whole DVS software will shut down Therefore it is recommended to finish all tasks such as a a play out op eration beforehand Otherwise the respective task may get interrupted This closes the DVS software After that you can for example shut down the system PVs The Menus 8 3 The Edit Menu The menu Edit provides functions to aid you in your editing process In detail it contains the menu options shown below Ctrl Z Ctri Figure 8 6 The Edit menu They are described in the following sections 8 3 1 Undo The menu op
131. d from an output button M or locked barred from editing button L With the button SETTINGS at the top left side of the timeline area you can determine the output format video raster of the project Here you can also configure the size of the video and or audio tracks There is also a setting available that per forms an autoscaling of the material in the timeline if the reso lution differs from the configured output raster As a next step we want to delete one of the clips from the timeline and change the sequence of the remaining clips 3 2 4 Moving Clips in the Timeline Because for this tutorial we want to have only two clips in the video track clip B and clip A in this particular order we have to delete the second part of clip A and then change the sequence of the remaining two clips For this perform the steps as described below e Select the second part of clip A the last clip present in the timeline with a click of the mouse and delete it with the keyboard key Del The representation of the clip in the timeline will be deleted and you will see two remaining clips in the video track of the timeline Figure 3 7 Clip A and clip B in timeline Now we want to change the sequence of the remaining two clips e Select clip B second clip in the timeline with the mouse and drag it along the timeline to the beginning of the timeline PVs Getting Started Figure 3 8 Changing the position of the clip W
132. d the configured output settings the prerendering may take some time Further information about how to manage projects best when parts of the timeline need to be prerendered can be found in section Notes on Project Management on page 2 11 After a prerendering save your project file If an already saved project file is not saved after a prerendering process again the prerendered files will not be recognized by the Edit Tool when the project file is loaded once more i e they will not be used for a play out They remain on your storage and have to be deleted manually as described in section Cleaning Tempo rary Data Manually on page A 22 8 2 12 Extract files The Extract files menu option copies all files on the timeline to a specified directory or volume thus allowing you to archive an edited project The directory structure of the files on the storage will be copied as well Once this menu option is selected the following window will be displayed on the screen Extract files from Project xX Destination Heads Tails Cancel Figure 8 5 Archiving a project In this window enter the target directory volume of the files to be cop ied in the field Destination You may also use the button to the right of this entry field I to select an already existing directory volume or create a new one via the provided buttons of the opening dialog win dow If the entered path does not exist it will be create
133. ded and applied to the timeline via the video format settings optional feature see section Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File on page 6 17 Figure 7 26 The area for to set a static LUT In the area Static LUT you can find at its top a list box that will contain the LUT files in the order they were selected If the list box contains more than one LUT the effects of the LUT files are combined to color correct the images of the clip Below the list box three buttons are available With the button you can load a LUT For this select in the opening dialog window the direc tory path and file name of the look up table After this confirm your se lection with the button OPEN This will load the selected LUT file and its name and path will be entered in the list box above File extension lut Look up table CXE The selected file will then be valid for the currently selected clip and a color and or gamma correction will be performed accordingly By re peating this action you can select and load more than one LUT file and their effects will be combined Several sample LUT files are delivered with the DVS software i They can be found in the directory Lut of the software s instal lation path default c Program Files x86 DVS Clipster With the button you can delete an already applied LUT from the list box Simply select an LUT file entry from the list box and press this but ton to delete it
134. e 5 Stop speed 0 Space K Shift K Start play out from inpoint 6 Increase speed by 1 speed will be indicat ed in fps in play button L Increase speed by 0 1 speed will be indi Shift L cated in fps in play button Decrease speed by 1 speed will be indi J cated in fps in play button Decrease speed by 0 1 speed will be in Shift J dicated in fps in play button Step one 1 frame forward Right Arrow 4 Step one 1 frame backward Left Arrow 3 Step ten 10 frames forward Shift Right Arrow 2 Step ten 10 frames backward Shift Left Arrow 1 Jump to project begin Pos 1 Jump to project end End Go to next cutting point Ctrl Right Arrow S Go to previous cutting point Ctrl Left Arrow A Activate insert mode Activate overwrite mode Trim move by one 1 frame forward Trim move by one 1 frame backward L Trim move by ten 10 frames forward Trim move by ten 10 frames backward M Add edit cutting point Shift H Delete selected clip s in the timeline in Z overwrite mode lift Delete selected clip s in the timeline in X insert mode extract Set timeline inpoint E l Set timeline outpoint R O Appendix Action Shortcut Set
135. e on page 6 47 and section The Marker Table on page 4 30 The following controls are available This button saves the entries in the drop table to a file Enter in the opening dialog window a storage path and file name for the drop table list to be saved Then confirm your settings with the button SAVE and the table will be saved to the specified location Compared to the drop report saved by de i fault by the performance monitor this button only saves the entries currently available in the drop table see section The Performance Monitor on page 4 32 As soon as the real time operation is finished and when drops have occurred the button MARK ALL will be available With it you can retrieve further in formation about the locations where drops oc curred It places timeline markers in the timeline of the Edit Tool for each entry available in the drop ta ble 4 39 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs Once the placing of the markers is finished this button shows the labeling UNMARK ALL Then you can remove with it all timeline markers from the timeline in one step A The MARK ALL button will not be available i in the I O Tool because this module pro vides no timeline where markers can be set Clear The CLEAR button deletes all entries displayed in the drop table Afterwards you may start a new real time operation which in turn may report new drops in the table This button will be av
136. e 6 75 You can configure the time stretching or time compression via the menu option Time stretching on the context menu of a clip see section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 55 and section The Context Menu of Audio Clips on page 6 63 It will open the follow ing window 6 51 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 52 Time stretching x Timestretch factor Manual Preset custom X Resize Timeline Element Cancel Figure 6 50 Time stretching or time compression configuration To configure the time stretching or time compression use the items of fered under Manual When adjusting the slider the factor value in the entry field to the right changes accordingly Alternatively you can enter a factor directly in the entry field to the right of the slider Slider Factor Movement Meaning Values less than one 1 mean that the clip lt 1 left gets time stretched i e its play out will be slower slow motion Values greater than one 1 indicate a time gt 1 right compression of the video clip i e its speed will be increased fast motion The combo box Preset allows you to select common timing changes from its drop down list Once one of the predetermined settings is se lected the Manual items will be adjusted accordingly The Resize Timeline Element check box resizes the clip automatically in the timeline accordingly once the settings for stretching compression
137. e Factor and Pixel Movement Movement Range X left negative right positive Slider 7 17 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs Slider Image Factor and Pixel Movement Movement Range Y left negative right positive As already indicated in the table above to the right of the sliders you can find entry fields where you can specify either the image movement factor or the movement in pixels manually Simply enter the respective value with the appropriate sign as specified in the table to pan the im age The factor and pixel range entries have to be set in dependence on the settings made for zooming Slider 7 7 3 Advanced Settings Below the items for panning you can find a combo box to determine the filter used for zooming as well as two sliders to set the rotation and sharpness Filter Adaptive Filter real time Aperture Rotation LT _ Keyframing Figure 7 13 The advanced settings items The combo box Filter is associated with the sliders for sharpness set ting Aperture and zooming It determines the algorithm that will be used to change the video image content The following settings are available on the list of the combo box Filter Meaning Classic real This filter uses an algorithm without filtering time and is ideal when working with light scaling factors only because it results in very sharp pictures If this filter is selected all altera
138. e can be deleted e Set the inpoint of the timeline at the position where the range should begin see section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 28 e Set the outpoint of the timeline at the position where the range should end see section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Time line on page 6 28 Now you are able to delete the timeline elements e Call up the context menu of the timeline scale and select the menu option Delete from in to out The menu option Delete from in to out will be available as soon as an in and outpoint of the timeline are set The Timeline Prerender Add marker Remove marker R e all markers Set makers automatically Delete from in to out Figure 6 36 Deleting timeline elements from a timeline range This will delete all timeline elements between the in and outpoint of the timeline If appropriate the elements will be cut at the position of the in outpoint Whether a gap occurs in this part of the timeline or the rest of the timeline is moved to the left to stay in direct connection with all previous timeline elements depends on the insert overwrite mode of the timeline area see also section Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 30 When a track is locked see section Mut ing and Locking Tracks on page 6 32 its timeline elements are not deleted 6 4 6 Performing a Cut Once at least one clip is present in the video or a
139. e documentation for the different parts of the DVS system all in HTML format lt 7 The manuals for the DVS system are also available in PDF for i mat which is suited most if you want to print out the docu ment The documentation in PDF format can be accessed easily via the navigation buttons at the bottom of each HTML page 8 21 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide 8 22 Appendix This chapter provides further information about the Edit Tool A 1 Glossary of Terms Here you can find several terms and their meaning as they are used in this documentation 1D LUT 3D LUT 9 pin protocol RS 422 ALE audio clip bin bin clip clip A look up table LUT see below that provides for one input value a set of output values usu ally RGB A look up table LUT see below that provides for three input values RGB a set of output val ues RGB Protocol for serial data communication The RS 422 9 pin protocol is widely used for a com munication between a range of equipment such as VTRs digital disk recorders mixers edit controllers etc See also RS 422 and Odetics protocol DVS supports this protocol in master and slave mode Avid Log Exchange A list which describes a timeline with clips For further details about it and its format see the documentation of Avid Technologies See also data list A file of the Windows file system that contains audio data Library and clip management
140. e first and the last frame are not ver ified automatically formed about this the same way as described in section Check i If the first and or last frame of a clip is missing you will be in Bin on page 8 15 If a clip is played out where frames are missing the missing frames will be substituted by the DVS software automatically with a standard im age Figure 6 52 Substitute image for a missing frame Then it is best to check your bin and thus your timeline for inconsisten cies more thoroughly with the menu option Check Bin on the Bin 6 57 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs menu see section Check Bin on page 8 15 This menu option will provide you with a list of the clips where frames are missing After that either the whole clip or the missing frames should be replaced 6 5 4 Processing the Source Material of a Timeline Element 6 58 The Edit Tool provides an export of either the original source material or a copied version of it to a third party application of your choice This way you can process the source material of a video clip further and af terwards use it again in the DVS software without any difficulty When a clip is present in a video track of the timeline area you can pro cess its source material either by using the original data directly de structive export or by previously copying the material beforehand To do this you have to use the menu option Export to application o
141. e graph s scale For this select from the context menu ei ther the Timecode Display or Frames Display menu option This will change the notation of the graph as well as of all position and length indicators in the software module 7 8 3 Moving within the Graph The graph provides a cursor same as the timeline cursor of the Edit Tool They are connected to each other meaning when one of them is moved the other one will move accordingly This way you can move in the graph directly and see the effect of a keyframing in the overlay im mediately timeline cursor Figure 7 19 The timeline cursor in the graph To position keyframes or review their effect you may want to move the timeline cursor in the graph There are several ways to do this You can click anywhere with the mouse in the graph and the time line cursor will be positioned there immediately The timeline cursor of the graph can be scrubbed the same way as you can scrub a scrub bar timeline of the DVS software 7 25 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 26 You can use the controls of the Edit Tool as usual to move in or play out the timeline see section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 25 The cursor of the graph will be moved accordingly You can set an in and outpoint for the timeline see section Set ting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 28 for example to confine a play out to the clip currently
142. e hidden If you pull it farthest up you can hide the video track s 6 5 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 6 Video and Audio Track Properties Via the SETTINGS button you can alter the size and number of video and audio tracks It is located at the top left side of the timeline area After pressing this button the Time line output settings window is displayed At the bottom of this window you can find in the Options area further optional settings To the left you can find settings to alter the size and number of the video and audio tracks in the timeline The other items available in the Options area are explained in li their respective sections for an overview see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 11 Options Track Size Video Custom Audio Small Figure 6 4 Track size options With the fields for the track sizes you can adjust the height of the tracks for video and audio separately Either change the sizes by selecting one of the preset sizes from the combo boxes to the left Smal1 Medium Large or enter the pixel height manually in the adjoining entry fields Individual track sizes can also be configured for each track in i the timeline area manually see section Changing Track Sizes Manually on page 6 7 Additionally you can find here to the right entry fields where you can set the amount of audio and video tracks that will be visible in the time line area
143. e section Jobs on page 4 29 The Timeline You can delete prerendered data for example if itis no longer required with the menu option Delete prerendering on the context menu of a video clip For more information about the prerendering process in general see section Working with Prerendered Data on page 2 9 After a prerendering save your project file If an already saved AN project file is not saved after a prerendering process again the prerendered files will not be recognized by the Edit Tool when the project file is loaded once more They will not be used for a play out and have to be deleted manually as described in section Cleaning Temporary Data Manually on page A 22 menu option on the menu Project see section Prerender all G Also related to the prerendering of files is the Prerender all on page 8 11 ie 6 4 9 Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Elements Before a clip is added to the timeline you may adjust its inpoint via the bin of the Edit Tool see section Preparing Clips for Editing Purposes on page 4 20 However after clips or other timeline elements are add ed to the timeline you have further possibilities at hand to change their in and outpoints M7 For a frame accurate trimming of the in and outpoints you i may also use the appropriate keyboard shortcuts after the se lection of the in outpoint handler see also section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 6
144. e the preset effects to alter settings of an effects opera tor already applied to a clip e Select the effects operator from the effects list of the timeline ele ment properties so that its settings are visible in the settings pane to the right 4 25 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs e After this drag and drop the preset effect into the settings pane In case the preset effect has been assigned a keyboard Li shortcut see section Creating Preset Effects via the Key board on page 4 24 you may also press the function key of the respective preset effect to apply it By pressing an unassigned function key you can call up a list of all available preset effects for this effects operator Then you can use it to select one of the preset effects and apply it same as Load Preset see section Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area on page 7 14 The predefined settings of the preset effect will be set for the already applied effects operator same type as the effect selected from the effects list of the i The settings will only be adjusted if the preset effect is of the timeline element properties 4 3 4 Administration of Preset Effects To facilitate your work with preset effects they can be administered in several ways For example they can be renamed or deleted as well as saved or loaded This section explains the various possibilities to admin ister preset effects Most of these tasks require the usage
145. e timeline scale Depending on the optional features and the hardware equip i ment available your DVS system may still be able to handle el ements that are marked to be prerendered in real time However if non real time capable material is played out frames will be dropped see section The Performance Moni tor on page 4 32 With operators that are not real time ca pable the system will simply not apply them In both cases the material has to be prerendered prior to a play out Whether the DVS software marks a timeline element to be pre rendered can to some degree be determined with a setting in the Configuration Tool More information about this can be found in the Fuze Configurations user guide eS assar I Iaa lt _ _ _ yellow line gau IN tio hao Figure 6 38 Timeline element marked for prerendering Additionally video clips that are subject to a prerendering will be marked in the timeline with colors yellow The clip has to be prerendered see figure above purple The clip is currently prerendered Its progress can be seen in the job list blue The clip is already prerendered With a double click of the mouse on the timeline scale below the yellow line you can start the prerendering process Alternatively you can use the menu option Prerender on the context menu of the timeline ele ment The progress of the rendering can be seen in the job list of the tab Jobs se
146. e will be deleted as well 4 21 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 3 Effects The tab Effects of the tool area provides access to the effects delivered with the DVS software After starting the software the bin is by default activated in the tool area Once you select the tab Effects in the tool area the area will look similar to the following Jobs Markers Perform Available Operators titling E dve colorcorrection effects pane o Figure 4 15 Available effects in the tool area The effects pane offers you the available effects operators in a tree structure Either by double clicking an entry with the mouse or by click ing on the plus or minus sign in front you can expand or collapse the contents sorted under this entry As soon as the individual effects operators are visible you can start using them on clips in the timeline The individual effects operators provide you with additional editing fea tures for your video processing tasks However they may be part of op tional packages This section explains how to administer the effects available in the ef fects pane i e how to create and apply preset effects Further information about effects in general as well as individ i ual effects operators and their controls can be found in chapter Timeline Element Properties on page 7 1 4 3 1 Adding Effects to the Timeline 4 22 The effects operators available in the effec
147. ea can be select ed in one step either with the menu option Select all of the context menu or the keyboard shortcut Ctrl A when the contents area has the focus Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips Bin clips and timeline elements can be cut or copied to the clipboard of the operating system and afterwards pasted again at the location of your choice either in the contents area of the bin or on a timeline track The elements in the clipboard can also be pasted into a new project With this you can copy or move the selected element s within the bin e g from folder to folder within the timeline e g between tracks or within one track between the bin and the timeline tracks or vice ver sa Elements such as clips pasted into the timeline will be added at the current position of the timeline cursor Furthermore to paste clips to different timeline tracks rather than the first track you have to lock the The Tool Area lower track numbers where the pasting should not occur see section Muting and Locking Tracks on page 6 32 rn When operating between bin and timeline or vice versa the se i lected clip s will be added i e copied x For these procedures the focus must be set correctly For exam ple when operating in the bin its contents area not the folder area must have the focus The cut copy and paste operations can be initialized either via the con text menu of the selected element
148. eal time processes It is recommended to copy the ma terial to the main storage of the DVS system beforehand Before connecting another DVS CineReel save the project and start a new one Otherwise the references to the first DVS CineReel will be void 8 2 9 Export as With the menu option Export as of the Edit Tool you are able to cre ate data lists in the EDL format CMX or GVG from the timeline of the Edit Tool The selection of this menu option opens the following window where you have to specify the creation of the data list further Export EDL ce gaps with bladeclips In Out Internal estination Offset 00 00 00 00 Options _ Add reel replacement list Ovenwrite tapenames of bin clips Name Effects Keep transitions EDL Format CMX Cancel Figure 8 4 Window to specify the creation of an EDL 8 7 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 8 In the window to export an EDL enter the necessary details as indicated in the following EDL File Name In the entry field File you have to state the storage path and file name of the data list to be created You may also click on the button to the right of this field to select an already existing file Notation drive _letter directory subdirecto ry filename Instead of the backslash you may also use a slash The file name can be a standard file name of the Windows operating system i e do not use one of the following characters
149. ect another wipe for the transition than the default one from the Transition type list box The following lists the transitions that are currently implemented The num bers indicate the SMPTE number which are provided in the Transition type list box as well The graphics show the effects of the respective wipe and if not reversed the transition occurs towards the increasing white area 7 7 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs Crossfade Dissolve 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 e a m Aaa OORNAG AE ojej Tots FT E PE Le E MaE aT 213 4 1 221 222 224 225 226 231 232 233 234 235 236 ane B WEZ a 241 242 243 244 251 252 253 254 409 Figure 7 4 SMPTE wipes of the DVS software PVs Timeline Element Properties After selecting one of the available wipes you have further possibilities at hand to adjust the transition Item Description Softness Use the Softness slider and the percentage value to its right to adjust the softness feathering of the wipe Then the edges of the emerging image appear softer so that they blend into the receding image with less contrast With the slider you can set the softness to values between O and 100 However with the percentage value to the right of the slider you can select values even greater than 100 Use the controls to the right of the entry field to step the value up or down until it is set as desired St
150. ected File number will be setting Minimum number With these radio buttons you can determine of digits the minimum amount of digits that the numbering should provide Either you let the DVS software decide how many digits the file numbering should provide auto or you set it manually with the entry field to the right A preview of the file name can be seen below the items to set a num bering For example when as a file name prefix scene is entered and as the file extension lt Date gt lt Video format gt lt Color space gt _ is specified with a 5 digit numbering you may receive an output like the following scene 20090101 _1080p24 RGB _00000 dpx scene 20090101 _1080p24_ RGB 00001 dpx scene 20090101 _1080p24_ RGB 00002 dpx scene 20090101 _1080p24_ RGB 00003 dpx e Once the file names are set as desired click the OK button This will close the window to configure the name options and you will be returned to the finalize dialog With this the configured file naming will be detailed in the finalize dia log accordingly entry field File name result When the File name extensions were activated via their check box in the name options the field File name result will be unavailable The set name options will be applied to the generated files as soon as the rendering is initialized Timeline Element Properties Timeline element properties are provided for video clips as well as tran sitions They can be used
151. eed the current insert overwrite mode of the timeline More infor mation on this can be found in section Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 30 To take a clip directly from the contents area of the bin and add it to the tracks of the timeline perform the following e If required prepare the clip to be added to the timeline for editing purposes as described in section Preparing Clips for Editing Pur poses on page 4 20 and section Changing the Properties of Clips on page 4 21 e Then select the clip in the contents area of the bin and drag and drop it with the mouse into a video or audio track Video clips can only be dragged to the video track s of the Edit Tool and audio clips only to the audio tracks The Timeline timeline video track audio tracks Figure 6 2 Drag and drop of video clip to timeline Once the mouse button is released a representation of the clip is added to the timeline rn When using clips from the bin they are neither removed nor i deleted there They will remain in the bin for future use so that you can add the clip or other parts of it to the timeline again The clip will be placed at the position of the mouse pointer where the mouse button was released After adding a clip to the timeline a gap may appear Gaps can i be indicated by a red line in the timeline scale If this occurs 5 you can move the clip easily to the beginning of the timeline
152. eeeeeeeeeeeeenees 6 10 create ooo eeccecccecceeceeeeceeeeeeeaeees 4 37 drop report 3 2 4 33 4 39 J DVS information file 3 15 4 37 location ooeec 4 33 4 37 JOD sa en ee ne a nee es 4 29 look up table nsss A 3 background 22s ccsiercceiveccsectisdes 4 29 sample files t2uitecesetencnens 6 18 7 30 cancel hoces aiai 4 29 setting of 1D LUT 7 10 7 30 video overlay cccccsceeseeeteees 4 29 setting of 3D LUT 6 17 6 73 setting of static LUT 7 10 7 30 K specification 1D LUT A 14 specification 3D LUT A 15 key clos eer eee ee ee eee eee 5 12 see alpha channel loop mode ccce 5 12 5 15 keyboard Shortcuts cccccececcececee 6 28 VU le eo eect ces tanacateccecsee aaa earseate 5 5 5 7 keycode eo acccccsisesschrereeticeasss 2 12 2 13 notation oo eeeec cece eeceeeeeeeee eens 2 13 M reference number 000055 2 13 keyframing cccccccccsseccseeesseeeseees 7 21 maintenance cc cece eccecceee eee eeee eee A 20 activate n e 7 20 marker timeline 4 30 4 34 4 38 color coding ossessi 7 22 4 39 6 47 CUVINE ee 7 23 add automatically 2 lt 6 48 deleting keyframes 05 7 29 add manually naissensa 6 48 positioning of keyframes 7 25 7 27 configuration s 6 47 FESEt ooo ceececeeeeesesseseesseceeeeeeseees 7 23 delete sissies ior 6 49 selecting keyframes Pane 7 27 7 28 MOVING tO ccce 5 12 6 47 selecting settin
153. el replacement list data list 8 9 configuration DIM iaeiaiai 3 4 4 4 load defaults ii 8 19 load global settings 8 19 of default settings c2vudwnndn 8 18 Of projects eccere 8 17 save defaults cicccivesssisierstacieccas 8 19 save global settings 0 8 20 timeline osrand 6 5 timeline marker sssi 6 47 VIJEO SCOPES saiaxicaseets celui euedice 5 5 Configuration Tool 2 4 2 7 8 19 default settings eee 8 18 project settings ccce 8 18 connecting the driver s es 8 17 consistency of clip neeese 6 57 8 15 container format 6 71 6 75 6 79 A 2 A 11 contents storage ccce 2 3 4 9 contents area bin 3 3 4 4 4 16 context MENU straccsastespsarcasaense 4 17 Continuously ccce 6 8 control area oo cece eee eeeeeee eee eees 2 6 5 1 maximize enlarge cec 5 2 scrub bar nocere 5 9 6 26 COMUPOIS ee cccscnsocsvcedecteeivecexse 5 11 6 27 chart controls 4 33 4 36 table controls 6 4 33 4 39 conventions of user guide 1 5 CODY sacer 4 18 6 37 6 56 6 64 create bin clip finalizing ss i sesasdaaciies 6 70 Cita list sisirin 8 7 preset effect ace 4 23 7 15 GLOMDINE sczeccshoatcepnctesteciantanieieseds 6 20 enable 22s cpt euetecvietetcseto ied 6 23 Custom Name ccc 6 19 CUE ccivei sees bette eae 3 12 6 39 cutting point ee 6 39 A 2 previous next 06 3 13 5 12 D data list sirsie ieten A 2 DCI Mastering ccc
154. ensions check box you can add variable and or static components to the file names combo box The upper combo box is used to assemble the file name extensions By positioning the cursor or marking variables separators via a double click of the mouse in this field the extensions can be assembled or edited using the items described below Additionally the drop down list of this com bo box provides some predefined exten sions The last ten assembled and confirmed name extensions can be found here as well They will be available for the duration of the project and saved together with the project file 6 80 The Timeline Extension will be Select from this combo box the variable or separator that should be transferred to the upper combo box The variables will be re placed during the operation with the respec tive data If none is available Unknown will be output The variable Customized can be used for user defined strings With Customized se lected the user defined string can be entered in this combo box and then transferred to the upper one with the button ADD ADD Use this button to transfer the selected ex tension to the upper combo box It will be inserted at the current cursor position REMOVE By double clicking marking variables or separators in the upper combo box they can be deleted with this button To delete exten sions even without marking you may also use the respe
155. enu option Check Bin on the Bin menu see section Check Bin on page 8 15 If the first and or last frame of a clip is missing you will be in formed about this the same way as described in section Check Bin on page 8 15 Additionally with the project file the bin the timeline the viewing set tings the output settings etc will be set anew and the layout will be updated In the Edit Tool only one project file can be processed at a time i If you open another project or activate the menu option New the currently active project file will be closed However if you have already performed changes to the project you will be asked by the program if you want to save the current project The VTR task mode of the I O Tool uses project files different from the ones usually saved via the DVS software Further in formation about this can be found in the Fuze I O Tool user guide 8 2 3 Recent files The Recent files option on the Project menu opens a submenu where you can find project files that were recently opened in the DVS soft 8 4 PVs The Menus ware From the submenu select a file to work with the respective project again i You can adjust the number of files that will be listed on this submenu via the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configura tions user guide for more details x 8 2 4 Insert Project The menu option Insert Project enables you to import already fin ished and
156. eo frame field for or backwards in the timeline The Pos field will indicate this accordingly With this button activated a play out of the timeli ne will be performed endlessly in a loop Once the timeline cursor reaches the outpoint of the timeli ne the play out will start from the inpoint again To switch off the loop mode simply click this button again This button activates the forward backward play mode of the timeline In this mode an endless play out of the timeline will be performed once a play out is started When the timeline cursor reaches the outpoint of the timeline the play out will be reversed and the timeline is played backwards speed 1 until the inpoint is reached where the play out will be performed forward again To switch off the forward backward play mode you have to click this button again This button deactivates the slave mode and closes the Slave mode control window Fuze Edit Tool User Guide The Timeline For the editing process the Edit Tool provides a timeline with video and audio tracks where you can add the clips in the desired sequence as they should be played out in the end You can then for instance define wipes dissolves or cuts for the material This chapter explains how to work with the timeline in detail It will be discussed how to add clips to the timeline and how to work with them afterwards The latter will include among others descriptions on how to move i
157. erpolated A 5 2 3DL Files A 3d1 LUT file is a plain ASCII text file that has to match the follow ing properties Lines starting with a hash are comments and will not be evalu ated PVs Appendix The first uncommented line defines the input values RGB nodes i e the bit depth e g if the end value is 1023 than 10 bit and the number of nodes All following lines provide the output values R G B for one RGB node Each following line consists of three values R G B The separation is made by spaces You have to define all 177 x 3 values and the triplets have to be in ascending order The values have to be stated according to the bit depth between zero 0 and lt end value of RGB nodes gt After some comments for example about the file and its values the file starts with the input values Then it lists the color correction values leading to the following syntax Any comment Any comment lt RGB nodes according to bit depth and of nodes gt lt R of 1 node gt lt G of 1 gt lt B of 1 gt lt R of 2 node gt lt G of 2 gt lt B of 2 gt lt R of 3 node gt lt G of 3 gt lt B of 3 gt lt R of lt of nodes gt node gt lt G of lt of nodes gt gt lt B of lt of nodes gt gt The following shows an example of a 3DL file 10 bit value pairs in the middle left out Any comment Any comment 0 64 128 192 256
158. es provide in its graph an indication of the headroom In case your project has to provide a legal broadcast signal no color component should reach into that area When staying on the computer side and working with RGB material the headroom may be disregard ed Further information about color spaces headroom and full val ue ranges as well as color space conversions can be found in the Fuze Configurations user guide The Control Area By using the menu option Analyzer off the selected video scope can be turned off again at any time The color of the graph of the graph s background as well as of the drawn data for vectorscopes and the YUV parade only can be adapted to your needs via the Configuration Tool Please refer to the Fuze Configurations user guide for fur ther information Vectorscope 100 The vectorscope 100 is most suited when playing out in YUV It dis plays the chroma information of an output image without its luma in formation i e the color components U and V without Y Figure 5 6 The vectorscope 100 This scope shows a circular graph where the center represents no chro ma color saturation zero All white black and grey parts of the output image are located at the center of the graph The more the color values of an image increase the farther away the graph s dots will be dis persed from the center Regarding color the abbreviations R G and B of the video scope indicate the
159. et Effects in the Properties Area To apply the same effect settings of one clip to another the adjusted ef fect s settings in the timeline element properties can be created as an independent effect easily Afterwards they can be applied to other clips on the timeline without any problem To create such a preset effect as well as apply it to a selected clip in the timeline you may use the context menu of an effect in the effects list Further information about preset effects and for example oth i er ways to create and apply them as well as how to use them for several projects can be found in section Effects on page 4 22 Effects x Zoom Pan x Zoom Dan Delete Load Preset Save Preset Figure 7 9 Context menu of the effects list The context menu of an effects operator in the effects list provides the following menu options Delete This menu option deletes the respective effect where the context menu was invoked from the ef fects list After this its effect is removed from the clip in the timeline Alternatively you can select the effects operator and press the Del key on your keyboard Timeline Element Properties Load Preset Save Preset The Load Preset menu option enables you to load the settings of a preset effect to the respective ef fects operator After the selection of this menu op tion a dialog window opens where you have to select the wanted preset effect from a list Once
160. etc Thus you can create your perfect project When working with audio you can control the volume of a clip at every position in the timeline for example to create fade ins and outs Dur ing all times your original material is never touched or altered because all editing processes are performed virtually For the mastering of digital cinema content there is also an advanced tool available Once your project is finished you can finalize it and save the edited clips in any vid eo and file format you like Further important features of the Edit Tool are Projects can be finalized to a clip render function automatic and adaptable scaling of video material in the timeline autoscale 1D and 3D LUT support 1 1 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs hardware accelerated JPEG2000 compression and real time play out of JPEG2000 encoded material archive function for projects an automatic defragmentation of the main storage for an optimized real time performance 1 2 PVs Introduction 1 1 Overview This user guide informs you about the general handling of the Edit Tool as well as of its complete controllable interface The chapters in this user guide contain the following information Chapter 1 Begins with a short introduction to Fuze and the Edit Tool followed by a note regarding the audience this manual is written for and an ex planation of the conventions used in this man ual Addi
161. etching or Time Compression of Clips 6 51 6 4 14 Relinking CMOS cscsc ccecetirrach tes acttiiecitees se nsnehcatiaesieaces 6 53 6 5 Working with Video CMDS sisi ccssscocsceciacsetetamiasonceececcedarad 6 54 6 5 1 The Clip s Information sssssssseeesssssserrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrreesss 6 54 6 5 2 The Context Menu of Video Clips ee 6 55 6 5 3 Consistencies OF Clips saicisistsanisicinastnandivasdervaeeuesasenaves 6 57 6 5 4 Processing the Source Material of a Timeline Element 6 58 6 5 5 Vertical Editing of Video Clips in the Timeline 6 59 6 5 6 Displaying the Alpha Channel c ees 6 61 6 6 Working with Audio C IDS sasstedctecctateteategitetednieiaciesiadeateasiae 6 62 6 6 1 The Clip s Information sssssssseessssssrerrrrrrrrirrrrrrrrrressss 6 62 6 6 2 The Context Menu of Audio Clips ee 6 63 iii Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 6 3 Volume OTN acess ear eee es 6 65 6 6 4 Waveform Display is csesstersacsvsraneraatnannnsivesdearasindvenduenss 6 66 6 7 Finalizing the Timeline oes coscaa sacar cnet eases 6 68 6 7 1 General Settings vetcten 22 22k aoe ceeteti alae iaiceet eaegee es 6 69 6 7 2 Configuring Video acs sac2 ssc Sscecscecencecsdinideecsseneeacenteset don 6 71 6 7 3 Configuring Audio icrccivcecccacs nscaseestsese Gisacastestacenaneeess 6 75 674 FNAN E crsa a aa 6 77 6 7 5 The Finalized Output Files per Folder 6 77 6 7 6 Name Options sides cdeccec
162. ether with the project file the latter contains settings that will be used for each new project as well as for a general setup of the DVS system Because the default settings include configurations regarding the DVS system as well it provides compara tively more settings than the project related ones Use the default set tings in case you want to change the system settings or the default values for each initialized new project The settings of the tab Project will be stored together with the current project in the project file only and are therefore just temporarily available as long as this particular project is not closed The Configuration project menu option enables you to configure and set up the project related settings of the DVS system and software It will open the Configuration Tool with the tab Project activated Then you can configure for example the paths for the temporary data as well as other project specific settings such as the appearances of clips in the bin All changes performed on this tab will be saved together with the project file For more information and a complete description of the Configuration Tool please consult the Fuze Configurations user guide 8 5 3 Configuration defaults The Configuration Tool provides overall two configuration groupings one for project related settings tab Project and one for default set tings that will be used for the DVS system in general as well as for each new proje
163. example review the tran sition and evaluate its effect easily with the button REVIEW of the con trols see section Controls on page 5 11 7 9 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 6 Properties of a Video Clip Every video clip added to the timeline provides timeline element prop erties which offer you additional editing features for your work These editing features can be accessed in the form of effects operators Depending on its optional features DVS provides for the Edit Tool var ious operators that enhance the editing functionality of the DVS soft ware The following operators are available Effects Operator Availability Description Zoom Pan default Allows for example to set zooming and or panning for the video clip in the timeline It is by default available for all clips in the timeline 1D LUT default Operator to assign a static look up table LUT to a video clip for color and or gamma correction Subtitling default Part of the 3D stereoscopic work p flow option See the Fuze 3D Ste reoscopy supplement user guide Usually effects operators are applied to single clips on the timeline only but their settings can be transferred to other clips of the timeline easily see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 This section explains in detail the possibilities when dealing with the properties of a video clip The operators offered by DVS will be described in detail
164. ferenced to other source material manually from the timeline directly For further in formation about this see section Relinking Clips on page 6 53 Bin Clip properties With this menu option you can open from a clip in the timeline the properties of its source clip in the bin see section Changing the Properties of Clips on page 4 21 Add track Increases the amount of audio tracks that will be visible in the timeline area by one see also section Video and Audio Track Properties on page 6 6 Remove track Decreases the amount of audio tracks that will be visible in the timeline area by one see also section Video and Audio Track Properties on page 6 6 PVs The Timeline 6 6 3 Volume Control The button VOLUME is important for audio clips You can find it at the bottom of the timeline area to the left of the sliders to change the timeline s view This button displays or hides the volume control lines of audio clips With the volume control lines you can change the volume for each clip separately If the button VOLUME is in its active state the volume control lines are visible volume control 14 55 933 14 59 436 A line trol point n lt 4 100 level line contro point lt fAudio SingSingSing 0 1 Figure 6 55 Volume control of audio After dragging an audio clip to one of the audio tracks from the bin the wh
165. figure the Video Output on page 6 11 With this button activated a play out of the timeli ne will be performed endlessly in a loop Once the timeline cursor reaches the outpoint of the timeline the play out will start from the inpoint again To switch off the loop mode deactivate this button You can jump to particular points on the timeline such as cutting edit points and timeline markers with these buttons The first button jumps to the point that is previously located on the timeline while the second button jumps to the next one Al ternatively you may use the keyboard shortcuts A and S This button toggles between the insert and over write mode See section Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 30 This button plays around the current position of the timeline cursor several sec in a loop To deacti vate the loop review press the button REVIEW again The duration of the review can be configured freely with the with the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide for more infor mation The Control Area This field shows the current position of the timeline cursor in timecode or frames notation If you want to move to a certain position on the timeline you can enter the position in the appropriate format here After that press Enter and the cursor will then move to the entered position For more infor mation about the timecode frame number fields and their format see
166. file specifies an output value for each color component and the alpha channel key It is a plain ASCII text file that has to match the following properties Lines starting with a hash are comments and will not be evalu ated There is a designated line designated with the color depth for the four color component values RGBA For example for 10 bit video data the lines will start with zero 0 and end with 1023 Each designated line consists of four values RGBA The separation is made via tabulators TAB The LUT file has to provide 1024 x 5 input output values as used in 10 bit video mode If you work with 8 bit video data only every fourth value will be used from the LUT The values have to be in incrementing order The color component values have to be stated as floating point val ues between zero 0 and one 1 After some comments for example about the file and its values the file starts to list the color correction values Each line starts with the desig nation of the input value bit depth succeeded by the four color com ponent values first blue second green then red and last the alpha channel This leads to the following syntax Any comment Any comment lt input value gt lt B gt lt G gt lt R gt lt A gt A finished and complete LUT file may look like the following value pairs in the middle left out Any comment Any comment 0 0 009766 0 000000 0 000000 0 0 1 0 011719 0 000000
167. folders are available in the folder area of the bin you can sort them in descending or ascending order If your project contains a lot of folders in the bin this will make it easier for you to find an indi vidual folder To sort the folders do the following e Simply click on the title bar with the mouse Folders Audio Film C Film A Li Film B Film A Film C i Audio Figure 4 11 Sorting the folders This switches between a descending and ascending order of the folders in the folder area The type of order will be indicated by the triangle at the right hand side of the title bar Renaming Folders To rename folders and thus to give them a different name after they were created in the folder area of the bin perform the following Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs e Call up the context menu on a formerly created folder in the folder area of the bin and select the menu option Rename After this you can change the name of the respective folder e Enter the new name of the folder via the keyboard and confirm it with the Enter key Then the selected folder will be given the new name Only previously created folders can be renamed The root fold er cannot be changed in any respect Deleting Folders Folders can be deleted the same way they are created via the context menu e Call up the context menu on a formerly created folder in the folder area of the bin and select the menu option Delete To delete
168. ftware s online help see section Manuals on page 8 21 PVs Introduction 1 4 Important Notes Please observe the following while using the Edit Tool gt Pee gt Only use the designated video drive main storage to store video and audio data Other storage locations will be too slow for real time operations Leave about 15 of the overall main storage capacity empty of data for real time performance reasons The real time capability of Fuze depends to a large extent on the performance of the system s hardware Therefore it is rec ommended to terminate all other programs when working with the DVS software After copying large amounts of data to the main storage it is recommended to leave the DVS software running for a longer period of time e g over night without performing any real time tasks play out or having the slave mode activated This will give the built in defragmentation tool time to reorganize the files on the storage for an optimized real time perfor mance For this the automatic starting of the defragmentation tool has to be enabled Your DVS system has been tested thoroughly and is very reli able However because of the vast amount of third party software available its reactions on the installation of such could not be tested The installation of third party software may disrupt the real time capability and or limit the function ality of your system 1 7 Fuze Edit T
169. g the Display Type ccecce 6 9 6 2 6 Configuring the Video and Audio Output 6 11 6 2 7 Further Audio Configurations exscctocsecavecs shes dioeteetecteces 6 16 6 2 8 Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File eee 6 17 62 9 Cropping the Timeline 2ic c5 c0cstecsdtcsusnsss eavtehentcaneedesnn 6 20 6 2 10 Naming WWACKS misircrororroi einna 6 24 6 3 Controlling the Timeline tsctecactccrerittientniinnu cases 6 25 6 3 1 Moving within the Timeline o an 6 25 6 3 2 Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline 6 28 6 3 3 Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline 00 6 30 6 3 4 Muting and Locking Tracks 6 32 6 4 Working with the Timeline in General 6 34 64 1 Moving Clips within the Timeline wicscsiscossstssterecckecervaeas 6 34 6 4 2 Selecting CIPS cossinirct tir ai cotcinee terriers 6 36 6 4 3 Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips eee 6 37 6 4 4 Adding Clips of a Certain Length to the Timeline 6 37 6 4 5 Deleting Timeline Elements in a Specified Range 6 38 6 4 6 Performing a Cut sesiccesetetceredccnteietscescedeictesstsinieiestcces 6 39 6 4 7 Setting Transitions ee 6 40 6 4 8 Prerendering of Timeline Elements eeeeeeeeeeeees 6 41 6 4 9 Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Elements 6 43 6 4 10 Advanced TrimMing cecce 6 45 6 4 11 Marking Positions in the Timeline a nn 6 47 6 4 12 Attaching Audio Clips to Video Clips ee 6 49 6 4 13 Time Str
170. gap rendering Timeline output TC Clipwise rendering Options Ei Hardware finalize support Video 3B LUT 3D LUT Bitmap v Options 8 bit BGR ej Unlimited Format SD HD Film Other Matti SMPTE 274 YUV range Head RGB range Full Timeline TC Offset 00 00 00 00 TC Drop frame Off Pulldown Startphase Frame rate 24 prog Dominance Even fields 1 777 2 3 Off SMPTE 274 SMPTE 274 kd SMPTE 274 SMPTE 274 File format WAY Options Bit depth Render audio in Audio auto retiming Render Figure 6 59 Window to finalize a project 6 68 Dvs The Timeline In this window the finalizing of the timeline has to be configured Its settings and the finalizing process in general will be described in this section 6 7 1 General Settings When performing a finalizing you have to specify some general set tings such as the storage information and some timeline settings first They can be made with the settings items at the top of the window to configure a finalizing File name result _finalized we Name options Render path a Bin v Render from InfOut Disable gap rendering E Generic timecode Timeline output TC Clipwise rendering _ Options Figure 6 60 The general settings In the entry field File name result enter the name of the clip to be gen erated You may also click on the button to the right of this entry field BB to select an already existing file Notation Standard fi
171. gs o on 7 22 POSION a2ssejedactciebecveaduaceusengen 4 30 timeline Cursor ccccceccecccccees 7 25 SON manen eea af eneaeeh ce teae se 4 31 TOOT o E e E 7 29 able eea a aeri 4 30 VICW ZOOM occ ccccccccccccccceccceeecs 7 23 thumbnail sosser 4 31 types sirri iiei ka aotr aiaa as 6 47 L marking of CUPS n se 4 13 master lock ccccccceeeseceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 33 length master mute ensennensnnsirennrrnrnnne 6 33 of audio Clips ceceeeee 6 44 6 45 matrix tities eeeeeteeeneeeeeteneneteneteneetey 6 73 of clip 3 8 3 11 3 12 6 3 6 37 maximizing control area overlay 5 2 6 45 6 46 7 3 MENU Dal vezscdscesdeacdteivesiesaas doce 2 6 8 1 of timeline 6 2 6 46 help eee seeteeieneeeeeeneneetenteretetenens 2 8 of timeline elements 7 3 program iCOn ccecce 8 2 of transitions 6 44 6 45 minimizing the user interface 8 2 letterboxing sce ctcccevscet tei Giateigteetoee 6 20 missing frames 4 34 4 35 6 57 8 15 load mixing audio sestcccects asd Snareneckecdias 6 15 Dib PEE ree eee 8 14 mode default configuration 8 19 fine tUNINg eee eeee rere eens 3 8 6 35 global settings ccceee 8 19 INSEIL sss eee eeeeeeees 3 8 6 30 6 35 preset effects ceeeeee 4 28 overwrite n 3 8 6 31 6 35 project ene ee eee ROR CRN ae 8 4 SIAVE soesseeeeeteeeteeeteeeenees 5 11 5 14 location SNAPPING ooeec 3 8 3 11 6 35 of prerender data cc
172. gurations user guide for more information The way a finalizing is performed can be configured during the setup of the finalizing process see sec tion Finalizing the Timeline on page 6 68 When this button is labeled IN OUT you can set the timeline s in and outpoint The DELETE button is a toggle button If it is ac tivated EEES you can delete the in and or outpoint by clicking the inpoint outpoint or du ration button Regardless of the position of the timeline cursor the in outpoint will be deleted If the DELETE button is deactivated a click on the in outpoint duration button will set the inpoint or outpoint respectively To position the in and outpoint frame accurately you may use the in and outpoint entry fields Simply type in in the entry fields the position of the in outpoint that should be set Then press Enter to confirm it The in or outpoint will be set accordingly Further information about time code and frame number entry fields can be found in section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 14 The Timeline aw The inpoint button sets or deletes the inpoint of the timeline depending on the state of the DE LETE button When setting the inpoint will be set at the position of the timeline cursor Fat Same as the inpoint button but sets or deletes the outpoint Sees When an inpoint is set you can use this entry field to specify the duration for the timeline The
173. gure 3 4 Drag and drop of clip to timeline Once the mouse button is released a representation of the clip clip A is added to the timeline However its counterpart in the bin is neither removed nor deleted It will remain there for future use so that you can add the clip or other parts of it to the timeline again The video clip will be placed at the position of the mouse pointer where the mouse button is released However when the mouse pointer reach es certain elements on the timeline the added clip will automatically 3 7 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs align itself to these elements in our example here to the beginning of the timeline This behavior is called the snapping mode of the Edit Tool The snapping mode is a very useful feature if you want to po i sition clips in the timeline It reacts not only to the starting point _ of the timeline but also to the in and outpoint of clips the po sition of the timeline cursor or the set in and outpoint of the timeline You can disable the snapping mode and activate a fine tuning mode by pressing the Shift key While the starting point of the clip its position and inpoint within the timeline is set during the drag and drop procedure its outpoint is usu ally defined by the length of the clip However all these attributes can be changed easily after clips were added to the timeline their position within the timeline as well as their in and outpoints
174. hanges the locked tracks will appear dimmed in the timeline area 6 33 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 4 Working with the Timeline in General After adding clips to the timeline see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 you can begin your editing work by for exam ple altering the sequence of clips cutting clips or defining transitions To view your work on an additionally connected monitor you i have to configure the output format of the timeline accordingly see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 11 Performing editing work on clips in the timeline of the Edit Tool is very easy because most editing functions are immediately at hand where they are needed most For example the transition properties can be ac cessed directly from its visible part in a video track You can use the video overlay of the Edit Tool to monitor and check the progress of your work The output effect can be seen in the video over lay instantly For example clips of different sizes in the video track s of the timeline may be cropped stretched or compressed or scaled ac cording to your settings for the respective clips and your output set tings All these effects can be viewed instantaneously via the video overlay of the control area The DVS software uses only representations of the original ma i terial on the storage for the clips in the bin and the timeline All editing tasks a
175. he Time line output settings window is displayed At the bottom of this window you can find the Options area where further optional settings are provided To the right you can find the set tings items to load a 3D LUT file The other items available in the Options area are explained in their respective sections for an overview see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 11 Video 3D LUT 3D LUT Figure 6 16 Items to load a 3D LUT file After clicking on the button 3D LUT a window opens to load a 3D LUT file and create a profile for it 3D LUT Management Profile Output Color Add Delete Lin to Log Custom Name DVS_Out_Of_Gamut File incl Path stervluvDVS_Out_Of_Gamut3dl Cancel Figure 6 17 3D LUT file management To load and administer available 3D LUT files the window provides the following items Several sample LUT files are delivered with the DVS software i They can be found in the directory Lut of the software s instal lation path default c Program Files x86 DVS Clipster More detailed information about 3D LUT files can be found in section 3D LUT Files on page A 15 The Timeline Profile ADD DELETE LIN TO LOG Custom Name File incl Path 3D LUT Visualization In the list box Profile you can see a list of the already specified 3D LUT file profiles Each entry in this box represents one 3D LUT file Select from
176. he menu option Show alpha channel only on the context menu of a vid eo clip in the timeline of the Edit Tool see also section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 55 Then the video overlay and the DVS system s video outputs will show you the alpha channel mask of the video clip where the menu option was activated The parts of the images displayed in white are selected black areas are not selected i e keyed out In case a clip provides no alpha channel the displayed images will be completely white showing that nothing is keyed out 6 67 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 6 Working with Audio Clips With audio clips it is the same as with video clips The DVS software works with representations of the clips in the timeline only Throughout your work in the Edit Tool the original material on the storage is main tained and never altered By default the timeline area will show 16 audio tracks where you can add audio clips in the desired sequence set fade ins and outs and con trol the volume of each clip The number of audio tracks displayed in the Edit Tool can be set freely see section Video and Audio Track Properties on page 6 6 To get a proper output you have to configure the audio hard ware output accordingly see section How to Configure the Audio Output on page 6 13 The DVS software supports audio files with multiple mono or stereo channels If you drag such a clip from the bin to
177. he audio offset For this the area pro vides different settings items where you can specify the positive or neg ative offset value either in milliseconds samples frames or via a timecode If you adjust one setting the other ones will be set accord The Timeline ingly With the check box Copy to all tracks the adjusted offset can be transferred to all other available audio tracks easily Simply enable the check box and confirm your setting with the OK button to copy the synchronization settings to all audio tracks In the area Output Path s you can see the different digital audio channels that the DVS system provides With a click on the respective button select the digital audio channel s that should be used for the output An activated button between two channels configures the two channels to stereo With the settings of the area Audio Mode and the ones of the area Output Path s you can mix the audio signals of your project accord ing to your needs If the audio clip in the timeline is in mono it does not matter whether the audio track is set to stereo or mono The output on all selected channels will be the same i e the mono audio clip as it is available in the timeline Audio Clip Audio Track Output Mono Mono Mono of clip Mono Stereo Mono of clip If the audio clip is in mono the settings for the track s audio i mode and the channel s button provide of course no function reg
178. he bin In this section you can read what to do to administer clips For some of these tasks the context menu of the clips in the contents area is used It provides different clip related functions such as the add ing of a new clip to the contents area of the bin or altering its properties Name Resolution Properties Figure 4 13 Context menu of a clip in the bin 4 17 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs If the contents area is empty of clips and you call up the con i text menu not all menu options are displayed How to add clips to the contents area of the bin is in detail de scribed in section Adding Clips to the Bin on page 4 6 Selecting Clips Clips can be selected or deselected easily in the contents area of the bin For this perform one of the following procedures or their combination Although the table below describes how to select clips only J most procedures can be used to deselect clips as well Individual clips Individual clips can be selected with a click of the mouse on the respective clip Several clips Several clips can be selected disjointedly when click ing them while holding down the Ctrl key at the same time Range of clips A range of adjoining clips can be selected by clicking one clip the starting clip and afterwards holding down the Shift key while clicking the clip that marks the end of the range All clips All clips displayed in the contents ar
179. he check box is activated for ev ery clip in the timeline an individual clip in the selected file format will be created In addition a corresponding Avid Log Exchange ALE file can be created which can be enabled disabled as well as configured further with the OPTIONS button to the right of the check box ii The DVS software supports source timecode in several file for S via the name options or written to file headers can be config G The reel name s that should be output during finalizing e g ured in the Configuration Tool amp 6 7 2 Configuring Video With the settings items in the middle of the finalizing window you can specify the video format for the rendering of the new clip To make these available the check box Video output has to be activated With the finalizing function of the Edit Tool you are able to generate video and audio files together or separately via the check boxes When calling the finalizing window for the first time the items for video and audio are disabled Via the check box Video output at the top of this area you can enable the items for video and thus decide that you want to generate a video clip The same can be done with the check box Au dio output see section Configuring Audio on page 6 75 By turn ing on either one of these only the activated output will be created If a container format is selected as the file format e g Win i dows Media you cannot generate
180. he clips in the timeline and their output for the clip to be rendered must be seen in relation to the selected video format of the new clip With the combo box Auto scale set to Fit and the Original aspect ratio check box activated the clips of the timeline will be scaled to their maximum allowable width or height so that no infor mation gets lost If the aspect ratio is different you will receive black bars in the finalized images With this combo box set to Crop and the Original aspect ratio check box activated the images will be scaled to their maximum allowable width or height so that you receive a full image at the output If the aspect ration is different parts of the images may be cropped With the Auto scale setting set to Of the material will maintain its original size With the combo box Auto scale set to Fit or Crop and the Orig inal aspect ratio check box deactivated the aspect ratio the rela tion of width x and height y of the video format will not be preserved The resulting images will be stretched or compressed if the aspect ratio is different and you will always receive a full image at the output i More details about autoscaling in combination with aspect ra tio can be found in the Fuze Configurations user guide 6 7 3 Configuring Audio The settings items at the bottom of the finalizing window allow you to configure a finalizing of audio To make them available the check
181. he left of the sliders that change the timeline s view directly to the right of the button VOLUME A waveform is a graphical representation of an audio signal and the WAVE button displays or hides the wave forms of the audio clips Figure 6 58 Audio waveforms For each channel available in the respective audio clip one waveform will be displayed i e a mono clip provides one waveform only whereas a stereo clip shows two waveforms one for each channel The appearance of the waveforms can be configured to your liking with the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide 6 67 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide 6 7 Finalizing the Timeline Once a project is finished you can generate from a project s timeline a new clip in a configurable format and raster without affecting the orig inal material original data and project file are preserved This process is called finalizing and it can be made with the menu option Final ize on the Project menu see section Finalize on page 8 10 Via this option you can select the video and or audio format freely Ad ditionally you may limit the rendering of the timeline with a defined in and outpoint of the timeline or render video and audio separately After the selection of the menu option Finalize the window Final izing will be displayed on the screen Finalizing x oe File name result finalized g Name options Bin nd InfOut Disable
182. hen the dragged clip reaches certain elements on the timeline it will automatically align itself to these elements snapping mode see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 3 6 e Once the dragged clip reaches the beginning of the timeline release and drop it With the Edit Tool in the insert mode the rest of the video material will move backwards in the timeline as soon as the clip is dropped After changing the sequence of the clips this tutorial goes on with a de scription how to change in and outpoints of clips in the timeline 3 2 5 Manipulating In and Outpoints in the Timeline Clip A now the second clip in the timeline was cut during the adding of clip B to the timeline Thus it already provides a trimmed outpoint However clip B now the first clip in the timeline was added with its full length If a transition should be set between these two clips at least one of their in and outpoint has to be trimmed either the outpoint of clip B or the inpoint of clip A To demonstrate how to add a transition between the two clips we now want to change the outpoint of clip B in the timeline e Select the end of clip B first clip in timeline and move it to the left to trim its outpoint tail 3 11 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 3 12 Staph 236 Figure 3 9 Changing of outpoint As long as the insert mode of the Edit Tool is active clip A will automat ically adjust its position on the timeline
183. hing Audio Clips to Video Clips Sometimes during your editing work you may want to group audio and video clips for instance if they are already perfectly aligned and in syn chronization For this the timeline provides the possibility to attach an audio to a video clip tach one video clip to several audio clips only It is not possible to attach several video clips to one or more audio clips Further more it is not possible to attach clips of one type only e g au dio clips only i When attaching more than two timeline elements you can at S How to Attach Clips To attach audio clips to a video clip perform the following e Select a video clip and one or more audio clips in the timeline area with the mouse while holding down the Ctrl key e Afterwards release the Ctrl key and call up on one of the selected clips or on an empty part of the timeline the context menu e On the context menu select the menu option Attach 6 49 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 50 _ ywoon Remove control point VGE Delete _Night Attach 10 125 10 125 Disconnect element K 05 610 CSi 0 1 x Enable tooltip Time stretching Time stretching mode Prerender Figure 6 49 Attaching audio and video clips Once this is done the audio clip s will be attached to the selected vid eo clip Now if either one of these clips is selected in the timeline the other attached clip s will be
184. ht you can adjust the zooming Sim ply pull the sliders to the left to zoom out of the clip or to the right to zoom in Width Height Lock Figure 7 11 The items for zooming 7 16 PVs Timeline Element Properties Additionally you can enter either the zoom factor or the pixel size that the original frames should be set to in the respective entry fields to the right of the sliders manually Slider Slider Mo neni Result Factor Range Width left zoom out lt 1 Height right zoom in gt 1 With the check box Lock activated the original aspect ratio the rela tion of width x and height y of the video format can be preserved If enabled the images will neither get stretched nor compressed and the remaining value will adjust itself automatically enced with the combo box Filter Its settings are explained in G The way a zooming of the video clip is performed can be influ section Advanced Settings on page 7 18 x 7 7 2 Items for Panning To achieve a panning for the currently selected clip two sliders are at your disposal x AE o 0 Y TL Oo 0 Figure 7 12 The items for panning With them you can move for instance in a zoomed clip to the part of the clip image that should be displayed during a play out For exam ple if you move the X slider to the left the image will move to the left and if you move the Y slider to the left it moves up Slider Imag
185. ides first some background information about the structure of the DVS software which includes a short overview of its different modules After that an overview of the user interface of the Edit Tool is provided to familiarize you with its appearance This will be followed by a description of the task bar of the software The chapter will be concluded with some gen eral notes for example about how to manage projects with the DVS software 2 1 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 2 1 Overview of the Software Structure 2 2 The software package for the DVS system consists of various individual programs and modules that combined provide the system s unique ca pabilities to process digital video and audio in real time The following diagram shows the communication processes between individual soft ware parts and some hardware components in detail DVS System awa RL aa ware Hard Disk Array Integrated Spycer Configuration Tool User Interface PCI Video Board Driver L Software Figure 2 1 Structure of software Video Board and Driver The central core of the whole system is the DVS PCI video board and its driver because they provide the functionality of the video system Without them the system would not be able to display any video signals nor would the DVS software components be operational The PCI video board driver controls the video board and thus the out put of video signals
186. iecad esas foe eas ede sadaeeseeececnees 6 79 Timeline Element Properties 00 cccceeeeeeeeeeteeees 7 1 7 1 Accessing the Timeline Element Properties 0 eee 7 2 7 2 General Items of the Properties Area c cee eeeeee 7 3 7 3 Changing Values of Sliders and Entry Fields 00 7 5 7 4 Closing the Timeline Element Properties 0 0 0 0 cee 7 6 7 5 Properties OF a Transition ccecce 7 7 7 6 Properties of a Video Clip x cxcsctcieccsmtetieceetiete ites 7 10 7 6 1 Adding Effects ce caceccctata fecedect obec sancetigsiseiaceeateieteiel os 7 10 7 6 2 Altering Effect Settings vcctcccceseesedcecsenccessacheaxeiecabecienesss 7 12 7 6 3 Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area 00 7 14 7 7 The Operator ZOOM Pan Lscsssccsccccrierererreenee 7 16 7 7 14 Items for ZOOMINg agconccaecce de eae socec te acessaceseeteeanciese 7 16 Z2 Items for PARIS cicrctcacecotcteatteccecctecceauselanariedactatessiuas 7 17 7 7 3 Advanced Settings ooeseeeeeeeerrrrreeereeereesrrrrrnrrrrrreeree 7 18 7 8 KeyframMiNg paste cess ce Meas iesenii rnorsettetisnsi erron sie tasdisiadi aii 7 21 7 8 1 The Parameters List nsnnnnnnnninieesreeessrrnrrrrrrrrrrerne 7 21 7 8 2 Viewing the Graph siisssnsisernirirrissieosnacrirnnois 7 23 7 8 3 Moving within the Graph ssssssesseeeesssrnssrrnnrrrrrnne 7 25 7 8 4 Setting Keyframes c cccscsceeesseesseeeeneeeeeeeseeseeess 7 27 7 8 5 Positio
187. ifferent software modules of the DVS software The task bar is available in most modules and with it you can easily switch to another module After starting the DVS software the Edit Tool is started automatically E When you click on one of the inactive buttons in the task bar the respective software module will be loaded most of them in the upper part of the user interface The task bar provides the follow ing buttons C The Ebr button activates the Edit Tool of the DVS software This software module allows to edit video material It is automatically active after starting the software and described in this user guide VO The I O button starts the I O Tool of the DVS soft ware You can use it to capture video and audio ma terial with the DVS system from telecines VTRs or cameras You can find further information about the I O Tool in the Fuze I O Tool user guide With the button SPYCER you can activate the local content management software by DVS where you can browse and or search for data on local and net work storages Its management tools allow you for example to defragment data as well as to define or alter metadata Additionally you can preview clips and add them to the bin of the DVS software by a simple drag and drop procedure Spycer is de scribed in the Spycer user guide The Conic button opens the Configuration Tool Here you can configure and set up the whole video system and the software With it y
188. iiirsiroiriciririsieraorieiaritro 3 3 3 21 Preparing the BiM sirrsisiesireni aissis taraa 3 3 3 2 2 Adding Clips to the Timeline cece serene 3 6 3 23 Changing the View of the Timeline 3 8 3 2 4 Moving Clips in the Timeline sescccctsorstrescedteccorcarcdevetts 3 10 3 2 5 Manipulating In and Outpoints in the Timeline 3 11 3 2 6 Adding a Transition to the Timeline cecce 3 13 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 3 3 Exiting the Program Qe nen een eee 3 15 The Tool e pe 4 1 4 1 Changing the Size of the Tool Area 4 2 42 WMG BU esene sel pea ies aed ite Gen se R iad 4 3 4 2 1 Configuring the Bin n dea acdc 4 4 4 2 2 Adding Clips to the Bin ssesssssssssnnnrrrrrrreeereeeesrrrernn 4 6 4 2 3 lt Detailsabout Clips chctescsessi sven acasseesMatendemumgeiecsedasgaae 4 10 4 2 4 Working with Folders in the Bin neccsser 4 14 4 2 5 Working with Clips in the Bin ssicicsinsatccnneciccssetnieectanteas 4 16 43 ENEC serte e e E EE 4 22 4 3 1 Adding Effects to the Timeline eecsiicesiecsetecetendecceccscscans 4 22 4 3 2 Creating Preset Effects acs cs sess sae cen eee intehdeee ete 4 23 4 3 3 Using Preset Effects 2 sise icssesintetnensecesenscccnsiecadeess 4 25 4 3 4 Administration of Preset Effects cceeeeeesteeeeeeeeeees 4 26 gA 0 6 eee reer ee TREE Ren or ener ror eee enter en renee renee 4 29 4 5 The Marker Table ack orca ee hereto ced epee nates 4 30 4 6 The Performance Monitor
189. ill be unavailable If you are in the overwrite mode of the timeline the Edit Tool will create the head and tail necessary for the transition automatically You can delete a transition the same way you delete a clip from the timeline Simply select the transition and press the key Del on your keyboard With this step our example project is now complete and you can for example perform additional works on the timeline or play it out in the selected output format button SETTINGS PVs Getting Started 3 3 Exiting the Program To end the current software session perform the following A There is no way to end the Edit Tool alone When you exit the A Edit Tool the whole DVS software will shut down Therefore it is recommended to finish all tasks such as a play out oper ation beforehand Otherwise the respective task may get in terrupted e Select the option Exit on the Project menu or press the key combi nation Alt F4 alternatively es You may also use the menu option Exit of the program icon i on the menu bar of the user interface see section Exit on page 8 2 The DVS software will be closed and you can then for instance shut down the system dard automatically written Further information about the log files and the DVS information file can be found in section The Performance Monitor on page 4 32 i When exiting the program a DVS information file is as a stan _ Fuze Edit To
190. ilm It provides data for example about the film type the name of the manufacturer and the film stock Additionally a reference number for the respec tive image is given in order to match the film with a particular position of a data list Keycodes can also be stored in file headers if supported by the file format see also source timecode The usage of an effect on a timeline with defin able points of settings keyframes e g for to fade in out this effect In general a table used to transform data With the DVS software a LUT is used to map indexed colors of video images to a specified set of out put values A clip that is handled as one clip although it con sists of several individual clips Multi clips are di rectories of the file system that contain subdirectories with frames image files and or audio files The subdirectories and files must fol low specific guidelines to be recognized by the DVS software as a multi clip Protocol for serial data communication similar to the 9 pin protocol but with an extended com mand set See also RS 422 and 9 pin protocol DVS supports the major commands of this pro tocol in slave mode An editing effect that can be applied to video clips either as an embedded operator or as an operator set via the clip s timeline element prop erties A 3 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 4 outpoint clip outpoint timeline overwrite mode prerendering prese
191. ilm a Type Other nge RGB range Internal oO Internal tim ANC Pulldown Startphase output channels Audio auto retiming tatio Original aspect ratio pping Cropping LUT 3D LUT tubbing Monitoring Cancel Apply Figure 6 11 Window to set the output settings As a standard after selecting the video format settings the SDI output configurations are displayed Use the provided items to set the video format accordingly In this window you can also set the software to an autoscaling of the material to be played out if its original resolution dif fers from the configured output raster Additionally you can determine here the amount of audio channels that will be embedded in the video signal AIV This is provided because some external devices have diffi culties when handling embedded audio that provides more than four audio channels With the tabs at the very top you can set the output format for the dif ferent ports The output video format can be set separately for the SDI and the DVI analog outputs The settings items of the tab DVI Analog will be available once the check box Lock to Output is deactivated The Timeline As soon as you confirm your settings with the OK button they will be in effect The in and outputs of the system except the SD outputs will change their format respectively Depending on the selected video for mat for SDI the video overlay of the Edit Tool may
192. in and outpoint only if set accordingly via the Con figuration Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide Deleting an In Outpoint To delete an in outpoint perform the following e Press the button DELETE to activate the deletion mode for the in and outpoint e Click the in outpoint button EI or the duration button EB to delete both simultaneously The in outpoint will be deleted If both are deleted the whole timeline will be available again for a play out 6 3 3 Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline 6 30 The INSERT button toggles between the insert and overwrite mode of the Edit Tool Insert Mode In the insert mode a moved or added clip is inserted between the video material already present in the timeline The video material behind the insertion point is moved backward from its position The Timeline on the timeline In the insert mode no video material will be overwritten and intact undivided clips will be divided at the insertion point To set a transition in the insert mode there must be enough head and tail available otherwise the TRANS button will not be available For more information about transitions see section Setting Transitions on page 6 40 When working with attached clips in the timeline the over write mode is activated automatically Then you cannot switch to the insert mode anymore Further information about this and the attachment of clips can be found in section A
193. in can also be called on the area where the view buttons are located The layout of the bin will be set accordingly Additionally you may change the size of the tool area to get a i better view on the bin or to make items visible that cannot be seen in the visible part of the tool area see section Changing the Size of the Tool Area on page 4 2 Changing the View of Clips Via the view buttons at the bottom of the bin you can set whether the clips in the contents area shall be seen as thumbnails with text or with their text information only Text Use the button TEXT to view the clips in the contents area with their text information only Bin clip name io Color depth Color American_Beauty_Parn 30 12 bits RGB American _Beauty_Pan 1 x 1080 12 bits RGB Q Figure 4 6 Contents area with text information In this view you can easily alter the sequence of the columns to your requirements by dragging and dropping the column headings with the mouse Additionally you can sort the clips in ascending or descending order by clicking on a column heading see also section Sorting Clips on page 4 19 The sorting will also be available after switching to the thumbnail view of the bin again The kind of text information displayed can be set freely with i the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide for more information 4 5 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs With the butt
194. in the sections following this one 7 6 1 Adding Effects As soon as a video clip is selected in the timeline its properties are dis played in the timeline element properties area right below the timeline area Then the clip is ready to receive an effects operator display it first see section Accessing the Timeline Element i If the properties area is not visible in the Edit Tool you have to Properties on page 7 2 To the left of the timeline element properties area you can find the Ef fects list of the selected clip It contains a list of all effects operators that are currently applied to the clip Timeline Element Properties Effects Zoom Pan 1D LUT Zoom Pan 1D LUT Subtitling Zoom Pan Figure 7 5 Effects list of a video clip The effects operator Zoom Pan is by default available for all video clips in the timeline and thus is already available in the effects list of the timeline element properties However the same effect with different settings as well as additional effects can be applied to the clip To add an effect to a clip in the timeline perform the following If appropriate activate the tab Effects in the tool area of the Edit Tool see section Effects on page 4 22 for further information about this tab Select from one of the folders the respective effects operator that you want to apply and drag and drop it to the Effects list of the timeline ele
195. indow Finalizing allow you to control this window Use the button RENDER to start the finalizing pro cess It will be available as soon as the necessary in formation are set such as output type storage information and format Then the Finalizing window will be closed and the tool area of the DVS software will switch to the job list automatically see section Jobs on page 4 29 Additionally the state of the rendering process will be indicated by a progress bar As soon as it reaches 100 the process will be finished and the window with the progress bar will be closed You can then access the generated clip s on your storage as well as in the bin depending on your settings With the button CLOSE you can close the Finaliz ing window without starting a rendering process You will then return to the main window of the DVS software However already made settings in the Finalizing window will be stored 6 7 5 The Finalized Output Files per Folder The result output of a finalizing depends to some extent on the setting of the Files per folder items They allow you to configure the number of files that will be stored in one directory Files per folder Q Limited to 20000 K2 Unlimited Figure 6 63 The files per folder items By default the files per folder items are set to 20 000 frames because this is an appropriate value for the file system of the operating system Values below 1 000 files
196. ing CMDS tatctectsteziccttitganeent 4 19 folder area bin 3 3 4 3 4 14 context MeEnU 222 encceocedcecsssgeee 4 14 TORI sosirea eian 3 7 6 2 forward backward play mode 5 15 fragmentation assessment A 21 A 22 frame missing 4 34 4 35 6 57 8 15 frame number ou cece eee ee eee eee eee 2 15 see also File number finalizing o n a 6 69 6 79 OMSL serrara atanena 6 82 frame number timecode field 2 15 5 13 switch notation 2 15 6 8 frame offset cccccceceee cess a eeee 6 8 6 73 frame rate oo cece eec ees ee ee eee esse ees 2 14 frame field backward 5 11 5 15 7 27 frame field forward 5 11 5 15 7 27 frame end marker timeline cursor 6 26 A 2 frames dsasesousciva cer e asiat 2 15 frames vs fields display 5 11 5 15 PUM s ces ecaresceetehes 6 23 6 73 TN sssaaceotemee E oiled Sesegceees A 2 full screen ocene 2 5 3 2 function key ceeoccace tects cee 4 24 PUES saci E A E en eenaeweanca 1 1 G gap in timeline scewicentcercreetacaraicaden 6 35 COSC E EE TTET 6 36 WU E EEEE 6 37 l 6 finalizing o o 6 70 generic source timecode 2 12 6 70 global settings load esttaeias aes pee eee 8 19 SAVE e inti 8 20 glossary ene eee cence Peet oer eee A 1 H Head sissuigecin ie dactcbeidextainteeee 6 23 6 73 head 3 14 6 31 6 32 6 40 6 45 head vs full cece cteteuteainrnetiestzeteiees A 2 head vs tail seese A 2 headroom nssescccrererenren 5 4
197. into the DVS software again whenever you want see section Load global set tings on page 8 19 which will change for example the project configurations and the appearance of the DVS software 8 5 8 WEB service enable 8 20 The menu option WEB service enable activates or deactivates the web service SOAP interface of the DVS software The SOAP interface allows you to develop an application of your own that can be used to control the DVS software for example from a remote computer con nected to the DVS system via network Further information about the web service can be found in a separate document available in the direc tory soap doc of the software s installation path default C Pro gram Files x86 DVS Clipster PVs The Menus 8 6 The Help Menu You can get additional information about the DVS software via the menu options of the menu Help It contains the following menu op tions About Manuals Figure 8 11 The Help menu They will be described in the following sections 8 6 1 About You can receive further information about the DVS software with the menu option About on the menu Help For example here you can find detailed version numbers of the individual software parts of the DVS system 8 6 2 Manuals The online documentation of the DVS system can be accessed via the menu option Manuals on the Help menu It opens an overview page in HTML format where you can select a separat
198. iran irriaren 8 10 length ccce 7 3 prerendering cee 6 41 properties n o 3 14 7 1 7 7 FEVEISE ci iinekenee ettari te derana 7 9 setting a transition 2 6 40 shapes of wipes eee 7 8 SOFTNESS geeeecauad ees emae 7 9 starting point sicsscisiateetroieicscieieee 7 9 UIMMINE scascsSeacasiea tee ticacees en 6 45 keyboard shortcuts 000 6 43 SHAG krisicn reaa 6 46 SID aerar 6 46 t toriall sccscccsssieiccssearuaenesee eet 3 3 type OF Clips siririna 4 10 type of display oseese 6 9 typographical conventions 1 5 U Eip o E ET 8 13 user interface a 1 6 MMIIZE sisean 8 2 OVETV EW xicccciasesrasccnbceesereideeeness 2 5 V vectorscope 100 asiccsseidesditsicssssasi 5 5 vectorscope 75 ic sacecidearntacnunsssiaves 5 5 vertical editing cc 6 59 A 5 video file format ccc A 9 A 11 format cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 7 6 2 OUTPUT goonas cated adeiaepinectcastecante 6 11 resolution osese 6 11 6 74 PVs Index still image format seee A 9 IOC cioa daz beep tceenedeceo ened 6 32 thumbnail of clip sses 4 10 MUTE cierna e e 6 32 vertical editing cecce 6 59 NAME ceva csascdusadaonite eeacecasauadedens 6 24 video board 2 cec eee ecceeceeeeeeeeeaeeees 2 2 NUMDET coiesceececntvcevcccesecees 6 6 6 57 connecting the driver 8 17 POINOV Csi ssiaaudcionsies is craes tities cds 6 57 NIVERpedeassecteectassecarisetanctieccee 2 2 So ae eee ee eee een 6
199. is case replace the defective disk s as described in the The Control Area To the right of the tool area you can find the control area of the Edit Tool This area is used to pre and review your current project video ____ 9 overlay scrub bar e controls e Figure 5 1 The control area In the control area you can see at its top the video overlay which is used to view the video material Below the video overlay a scrub bar of the timeline is available At the bottom of the control area the controls to play out and move within your current project are located All items of the control area are described in detail in the following sections 5 1 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 1 Maximizing the Control Area By performing a double click with the mouse on the upper part of con trol area video overlay you can maximize the control area With this all other areas of the user interface will be hidden instantaneously and you can see the video overlay enlarged The previous layout of the user interface can be restored by performing the same procedure again 5 2 The Video Overlay With the video overlay you can view the material present in the timeli ne All clips and added operators to the timeline as long as they do not require prerendering can be viewed in real time While working the video overlay will always adjust to your moves on the timeline This provides a total control for
200. is oae 6 20 audio scrubbing cecce 6 17 CrOpp Ng acc ohiciecereaecns 6 23 effects sate hatch Seeesectesaians eee 7 13 ROO WS cee eskari eeigen ca tte 6 9 ending point transition 04 7 9 enlarging control area overlay 5 2 entering timecode ccce 2 15 entry field for duration 0 6 29 entry field for in outpoint 6 28 error diagnostic ee 2 4 4 43 exiting the program 3 15 8 2 8 12 export Index DiN siirre eee ee 8 15 data list pa2csocheo ieee aseues ee receeesees 8 7 default configuration save 8 19 destructive scc 6 58 effects ciesa ara a 4 27 global settings ccn 8 20 sequence processing e 6 58 to application c e 6 56 6 58 extension of files 4 27 4 28 7 30 8 4 8 6 8 14 8 15 8 19 8 20 extracting files eee 8 11 F fade in out audio seee a 6 66 efECE eaa aaa a S 7 21 fast MOTION ccecce 6 51 6 56 fields vs frames display 5 11 5 15 file extension 4 27 4 28 7 30 8 4 8 6 8 14 8 15 8 19 8 20 FIG format scccacescdcrccecossrescoreecredceetes A 9 SAPHIC sata cteccttinacenimaians A 9 file manager ws cscccccecececceeceesssees 3 4 4 7 File NAMES nccc 6 8 File number scence 6 10 see also frame number with audio clips cacecttvasssiscencents 6 63 filetype sisasnnissniagncnmmmanmesesacseseaes 6 73 file frame numbering finalizing 6 69 6 79 files per folder finalizing 6 73 6 77 film raster cocexssciddeesvoteveie
201. it in this track of the timeline The button MODIFY ALL applies the settings of the currently selected timeline element or with video clips of the currently selected and displayed effects operator to all elements of the same type in this track of the timeline With the RESET button you can restore the default settings of the currently selected timeline element or with video clips of the currently selected and displayed effects operator with a single click Effect settings for video clips can also be applied to individual i clips by using preset effects see section Creating Preset Ef fects on page 4 23 and section Using Preset Effects on page 4 25 PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 3 Changing Values of Sliders and Entry Fields Almost all operators provide sliders as well as entry fields to adjust their effects You can adjust their values and settings in several ways 1 Select a slider with the mouse and move it to the left or right up or down to the desired settings Use the Up Arrow Down Arrow keys after the selection of one of the settings by clicking in its entry field to step the value up or down Use the scroll wheel of your mouse after positioning the mouse cursor over a slider to step up or down the value Enter in an entry field the desired setting and then press Enter on your keyboard Place the mouse cursor over an entry field and use the scroll wheel of your mouse to step up
202. itor The performance monitor provides you with detailed information about dropped frames frames that the DVS system could not load or write in time during a real time operation Via the table below you can get in formation about the location where the drop took place For this the performance monitor provides the following items chart The chart offers you a graphical interpretation of the measured workload of the system During a play out or record operation the processing workload will be shown via bars in the chart It is in detail ex plained in section The Chart on page 4 34 The Tool Area chart controls With the chart controls you can control the appear ance of the results in the chart or create a proprietary DVS information file They are explained in section Chart Controls on page 4 36 status bar Right below the chart controls you can find a status bar which will provide you with status messages about the operation of the performance monitor It is described in section The Status Bar on page 4 37 drop table As soon as drops occur during a real time operation entries will appear in the drop table one for each drop that could be detected The entries provide in formation for example about the date and time when the drop occurred or about the file that was the cause for this drop You can find a description of the drop table in section The Drop Table on page 4 38 table controls Via the
203. itten as the source timecode into the files if supported by the file format During finalizing the selected timecode will then be written as the source timecode to the location in the files headers es pecially reserved for that kind of metadata Afterwards the finalized clip will contain the selected source timecode and it can then be used by ap plications that support source timecode The following settings are available Timeline The internal timecode of the Edit Tool s timeline output TC is written to the correct location in the file headers i e afterwards the internal timecode of the timeline is provided by the files as their source timecode The Timeline Source TC The source timecode provided by the clips al ready present in the timeline is written to the files headers as their source timecode i e if the clips already provided source timecode it will be preserved Clips without source timecode in formation may receive a virtual source timeco de see section Notes on Source Timecode and Keycode on page 2 12 mats see section Notes on Source Timecode and Keycode on page 2 12 To use the combo box Generic timecode the File format combo box has to be set to one of these file for mats The Clipwise rendering items can be used for example to create dig ital deliverables With them you can finalize the clips of the timeline to individual clips on the storage When t
204. ity The Tool Area 4 6 3 The Status Bar The slider to the right of the UPDATE button deter mines the viewing resolution of the chart When pulled to the left you will receive a higher resolu tion The bars displayed in the chart will get thinner and more bars will be displayed in the chart When pulled to the right the bars will get thicker and fewer bars will be visible In case of problems with your DVS system you may get asked by the DVS service department to create and generate log files Then you may use the but ton DVSINFO to store the most important informa tion in one file in ASCII format The file name of the log file will be requested_dvsinfo_ lt sys tem time gt txt with the lt system time gt added in the format yyyy mm dd_hh mm ss It will be stored in the subfolder dvsinfoin the log directory in the application data path of the current user SAPPDATA DVS Clipster forthe actual location type in at a command line echo SAPPDATA then press Enter 7n When exiting the DVS software a DVS in i formation file without requested_ in front of the file name is by default written to the stated location Only the last ten files will be stored The button RESET enables you to set the indication about how many frames were processed total and how many drops occurred during this time at the top right side of the chart back to zero Afterwards you may start a new evaluation of the real time performance
205. ject file s again and begin new prerendering processes It is recommended to perform the procedure described in the following only when you are sure that the directory for the temporary data contains material for the respective project s only For this it is best to use a project specific directory struc ture as described in section Notes on Project Management on page 2 11 Do not delete temporary data manually while the DVS soft ware is running specific in each project file With the respective project file loaded in the Edit Tool it can be found in the Configuration Tool of the DVS software group Project field Path for proxy data see Fuze Configurations user guide i The path to the location of the temporary data is stored project e If applicable shut down the DVS software e Open a file manager e g the Windows Explorer e Select the project specific path of the temporary data on your main storage e Delete all files and directories stored in the respective directory manually e After that start the DVS software and load the project s in ques tion Once each project is loaded the DVS software recognizes that the tem porary data is no longer available For prerendering this means that all parts of the timeline that had to be prerendered are marked for a pre rendering again see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 41 Then you may start a new prerendering process for e
206. k ages DCPs see the Fuze DCI Mastering supplement accessible via the software s online help The Edit Tool module supports edit decision lists of various formats via export function One of the main features of the Edit Tool is that all editing tasks are performed virtually i e the orig inal material on the storage is never altered The clips used in the DVS software are only representations of the original material on the stor age With this you can use the same material over and over again The I O Tool The optionally available I O Tool is mainly used for the digitization of a variety of different input sources meaning the recording capturing of video and audio data with the DVS system from other sources than computer storages You can capture material from any source you like and record it in a freely selectable format with or without color space conversion For instance you can capture data from telecines VTRs or even cameras as desired in an automated batch processing mode or manually Of course playing out the recorded material as well as of all other clips present on the system can be performed without any effort as well Furthermore the processing of data lists is fully supported in the software for example via import and export functions Integrated Spycer With Spycer the innovative content management software by DVS you can manage your content easily It is a software application capable of handling large a
207. l preset effects from the effects pane in one step perform the following e Call up the context menu on an entry in the effects pane and select the menu option Clear all presets After this a warning message will appear on the screen e If you want to delete all preset effects from the effects pane con firm the warning message This will delete all preset effects from the effects pane Saving All Preset Effects You can save the contents of the effects pane i e all preset effects to a file e Call up the context menu on an entry in the effects pane and select the menu option Save all presets e In the opening dialog window specify a storage path and file name for the effects file to be saved and confirm your entries with the button SAVE File extension xml Effects file 4 27 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 28 This will save the preset effects to the specified file By performing the above detailed procedure several times you can build up a library of dif ferent effects settings that can be loaded again later and thereby added to any project you want Loading All Preset Effects Already saved preset effects can be loaded at any time into the Edit Tool again With this you can add the presets available in the file to your cur rent content of the effects pane a specially created preset effects file see section Saving All Preset Effects on page 4 27 a standard project file or its de
208. le After loading the new settings will be set as the default settings of the Configuration Tool They will be applied for example each time a new project is initialized Additionally in the Configuration Tool you have the possibility at hand to transfer the default settings to the project re lated settings and thus to enable them for your currently active project 7 Some changes to the system settings will be in effect after a re i start of the software only Further information about the Configuration Tool and its set tings can be found in the Fuze Configurations user guide 8 5 5 Save configuration defaults Different tasks may ask for different settings With the menu option Save configuration defaults you can save the current default and system settings to an extra file Thus you can build up a library of dif ferent configuration settings and use them in the future again for dif ferent purposes without configuring the whole system anew The selection of the menu option Save configuration defaults opens the standard dialog window to save a file where you have to specify the path and file name for the configuration file to be saved File extension cf Configuration file Once the current default and system settings are saved you can load them into the DVS software again whenever you want see section Load configuration defaults on page 8 19 Further information about the Configuration Tool and
209. le headers The ones additionally received will be stored at a location for user defined data in the header and usually cannot be interpreted by applications other than the ones developed by DVS When processing such clips af terwards for instance in the timeline of the Edit Tool or when conform Basics ing you can select between the various timecodes provided by the clips which may give you more control over their position in the timeline z7 Audio files equipped with source timecode usually provide a i start timecode only Subsequent timecodes will be calculated and drop frame timecodes are currently not supported In the Configuration Tool of the DVS software you can configure the general way the software should deal with timeline and source timeco de see Fuze Configurations user guide Here you can set in the re spective group the type of source timecode that the DVS software will use as the default source timecode Additionally you can specify which timecode should be given out when performing a play out Furthermore throughout the DVS software individual clips may use dif ferent source timecodes which is a setting that can be adjusted in the clip s properties see section Changing the Properties of Clips on page 4 21 The type of source timecode used by each clip can be changed even when the clip is already used in the timeline of the Edit Tool And when clips do not provide a source timecode of their ow
210. le names of the Windows operating sys tem i e do not use the following characters S N lt gt Furthermore leave out the file extension Example Clip However instead of the entry field to set the file name you may also use the NAME OPTIONS button to the right With it you can endow the file name with variable information and or adapt the numbering of the created image files Further information about this can be found in section Name Options on page 6 79 In the entry field Render path you have to state the storage path where to store the new clip You may also click on the button to the right of this entry field I to select an already existing directory or cre ate a new directory via the provided buttons of the opening dialog win dow If the entered path does not exist it will be created Notation drive _letter directory subdirectory Instead of the backslash you may also use a slash Example v tempest act05 scene01 Regarding file name and path it would be sufficient for a rendering to enter a path in the field Render path and to state a file name All other information necessary such as the numbering of frames will be added 6 69 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 70 by the DVS software automatically For further information about this see section The Finalized Output Files per Folder on page 6 77 with the name options described in section Name Options i The numberi
211. ll times The automatic starting of the defragmentation tool of the DVS li software can be enabled or disabled via the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide for more information An automatic defragmentation will not be performed if real time tasks play out or record are running on your system or when the slave mode VTR task mode is activated The process can also be started manually at any time when the DVS software is not running see section Starting the Process Manually on page A 22 Exiting the Process Because the defragmentation process is automatically started together with the DVS software it will be exited with it as well As soon as the user interface of the DVS software is closed the process will be halted and shut down as well Operation When running the defragmentation process reorganizes the files pres ent on the storage during stand still times of the DVS system This means a defragmentation will not be performed under the following conditions Appendix When the system performs real time tasks such as a play out or record when the software is running in slave mode or when the software is running with the VTR task mode of the I O Tool activated If one of the above said is the case no defragmentation will take place After starting the DVS software the defragmentation process is running in the background of the system It operates in
212. loops at certain inter vals Each time it is started it will go through various checkings and phases of defragmentation Whether a defragmentation has to be per formed is indicated by a special assessment that evaluates the fragmen tation degree of the clips on the storage Once a defragmentation is indicated it will start by defragmenting the worst fragmented files and align them on the storage so that they are optimized for real time tasks such as a play out or a record In its next cycle it will take other not so worse fragmented files and so on until all data is defragmented suffi ciently Afterwards in each cycle only the checking is performed until a fragmentation is detected once more When operating at regular intervals with sufficient stand still i times and a moderate acquisition of data the storage of the DVS system will always be in a perfect state for real time oper ations The DVS defragmentation process uses proprietary routines to defragment the data on the storage The results will not be the same when using a third party defragmentation tool be cause it will not heed image file sequences Therefore do not use such for the defragmentation of the main storage A triggered defragmentation process is automatically halted as soon as a real time task is performed or the DVS software is set to one of the other above mentioned states and it will be started again when the software provides the operating conditions
213. lt stored with the file extensions cp or cp auto save if itis saved via the autosave function see Fuze Configurations user guide for more details Furthermore during the saving procedure 8 5 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs the old project file is saved as an additional backup file with the file ex tension backup cp File extensions cp Project file cp autosave Automatically saved intermedi ate situation backup cp Backup file of old project file If a file name is already assigned to the currently opened project this menu option will immediately save the project under the assigned name In the project file the bin and the clips of the timeline including all op erators will be saved Additionally a lot of settings will be saved within the project file as well for example the viewing settings of the software modules the timeline and the control area the output settings as well as the project related configuration settings made in the Configuration Tool of the DVS software i The VTR task mode of the I O Tool uses project files different from the ones usually saved via the DVS software Further in formation about this can be found in the Fuze I O Tool user guide 8 2 7 Save As The standard dialog window to save a file will open after the selection of the menu option Save As This menu option allows you to save a project file under a different name see also section Save o
214. lywood 00000 yuv 4 050KB YUV File projkt o1 Hollywood 00001 yuv 4 050KB YUV File projek _02 E Hollywood 00002 yuv 4 050KB YUV File projed 03 B Hollywood 00003 yuv 4 050KB_ YUV File O projecfl 04 E Hollywood 00004 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File project 05 Hollywood 00005 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File eo S Hollywood 00006 yuv 4 050KB_ YUV File e E Hollywood 00007 yuv 4 050KB YUV File project_06 Hollywood 00008 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File project_o7 E Hollywood 00009 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File project_os 5 Hollywood 00010 yuv 4 050KB YUV File project _09 E Hollywood 00011 yuv 4 050KB YUV File project_10 Hollywood 00012 yuv 4 050 KB YUN File project_11 E Hollywood 00013 yuv 4 050 KB YU File KA f p iel 1 Figure 3 2 Drag and drop of clip to bin The respective video data will then be made available to the DVS soft ware and you will receive a thumbnail of the material in the contents area of the bin When the thumbnail is selected it provides the follow ing features Effects Jobs Markers Perform a Name Resolution Color depth Preview Colormode Aspect ratio Framerate scrub bar e Audio channels Figure 3 3 Selected clip in contents area of bin 3 5 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs e Add another different clip to the bin by performing the drag and drop procedure again The new clip is added to the clip list of the
215. mation such as i source timecode in the dpx mov as well as mxf and Broadcast Wave file formats However some features e g multiple timecodes or the editing of header data are available for dpx files only With the help of Spycer the header data such as timecode or keycode information can be adjusted to your liking see Spy cer user guide for more information 2 6 1 About Source Timecode Timecode information stored in file headers the so called source time code can be used in the whole DVS software For example you can use source timecodes in the timeline of the Edit Tool and regardless of their position in the timeline the respective clips will always show and use their source timecode Then prior to a play out you can decide whether the internal timeline timecode should be given out as a time code signal or the source timecodes provided by the files Regarding source timecode there are some peculiarities how the DVS software deals with source timecodes Some of them are detailed in the following Normally image files capable of storing timecode information provide space for one timecode only in their header generic source timecode DVS systems however are able to receive e g during a record several timecodes incorporated in signals at various connectors During a write procedure i e when recording clips via the I O Tool dpx files they will write the received timecode information into the fi
216. me offset for the rendered clip It will be evaluated if for the clip to be generated a file format is selected that stores source timecode information in its header e g dpx Then the clip will provide this timecode offset in its source timecode 6 73 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 74 If appropriate and available select whether drop frame timecode should be applied to the source timecode written to the files with the TC Drop frame combo box It will be evaluated if for the clip to be generated a file format is selected that stores source timecode informa tion in its header e g dpx Further information about drop frame timecode can be found in the Fuze Configurations user guide If appropriate and available select the necessary pulldown method from the Pulldown and Startphase combo boxes The pulldown fea ture may be necessary when working with film originated material and offers a film to NTSC conversion It renders for example video data that is in 24 progressive frames sec film as 30 interlaced frames sec NTSC To use this feature the video track s of the timeline should i contain 24p material only With the CHECK button to the right you can ascertain that all material in the timeline is in this for mat Prior to using pulldown it is recommended to check the timeline with this button Further information about the pulldown settings and pulldown in general can be found in the Fuze C
217. me you can also use the settings of the effect directly Simply select one of the settings items in the settings pane of the effect and a keyframe will be created on the respective keyframing line at the position of the timeline cursor Then it can be adjusted to your needs with the settings item of the effect directly The settings items of the effect can also be used to adjust already avail able keyframes For this position the timeline cursor of the graph on a keyframe see section Moving within the Graph on page 7 25 and then use the settings item in the settings pane of the effect to change the keyframe An already created keyframe can also be adjusted precisely in the graph with a double click of the mouse on a keyframe This will open a small window in the graph where the setting of the keyframe can be entered Panx 3 00 3 00 0 42 Ok Figure 7 24 Exact positioning of keyframe The range of possible values that can be entered is indicated in the win dow in square brackets Once a valid setting is entered the keyframe can be precisely set either by using the OK button of the window or by pressing Enter 7 8 6 Further Possibilities 7 28 When working with keyframes there are further possibilities at hand for example to select and position keyframes or to delete them Just as easily as single keyframes can be selected with the mouse sev eral keyframes can be selected For this hold down the Shift ke
218. meline and how to set an in and outpoint for the timeline to play out or finalize the selected range only 6 3 1 Moving within the Timeline The Edit Tool provides two representations of the timeline in its user in terface There is the timeline with timeline scale and audio and video tracks in the timeline area and there is a scrub bar of the timeline in the control area of the Edit Tool Both can be used to move within your project Nevertheless other functions and items to move inside the timeline are provided by the Edit Tool as well All ways to move in the timeline are explained in the following Moving via the Timeline Scale With the timeline scale you can move within your project and position the timeline cursor timeline scale arco 0 0 8 0 0 a lin 0 0 00 0 0 0 oe 29 00 16 09 42 16 WLY WOO p ae Figure 6 26 The timeline scale To move within your project click on a point in the scale and the time line cursor will be positioned there Additionally by selecting the cursor and moving it to the left or right you can scrub the visible part of the timeline This part of the timeline together with the video and audio tracks can be scaled from a full view of the timeline to a partial view that consists of a few frames only Via the sliders below the audio tracks in the time line area you can change the view of the timeline and thus move easily within your project 6 25 Fuze Edit Tool U
219. ment properties Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs This will apply the selected effect to the clip whose properties are dis played in the area of the timeline element properties Its settings con trols will be made available in the settings pane to the right where you can then perform the desired adjustments see section Altering Effect Settings on page 7 12 Some effects operators or combination of operators are not i real time capable Prior to a play out their application has to be rendered see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 41 To delete an applied effect from the effects list of the clip in the timeline you can select the respective effect and press the key Del on your keyboard 7 6 2 Altering Effect Settings 7 12 effects list t e With the timeline element properties area you can set the properties of a video clip via the available effects operators The effects added to a video clip in the timeline can be accessed easily with the effects list to the left Effects x Zoom Pan Adaptive Filter real time Aperture I Figure 7 7 Video clip properties Simply select an effect from the effects list and its settings are immedi ately displayed in the settings pane to the right of the list Then they can be altered according to your liking and the changes are directly ap plied to the clip in the timeline The individual settings possibilities of the effects o
220. ments of the timeline it will automatically snap and position itself to these elements This is called the snapping mode of the Edit Tool It makes an easy positioning of elements possible The moved clip will react to the following ele ments Starting point of timeline Start and end points of timeline elements e g clips and transi tions The position of the timeline cursor Setin and outpoint of the timeline You can disable the snapping mode and activate a fine tuning mode by pressing the Shift key In the overwrite mode when moving clips or performing other work gaps may occur in the timeline A gap means that a clip is no longer in connection with previous or following clips in the timeline When nei ther audio nor video is available to output in this part of the timeline the gap will also be marked with a red line in the timeline scale 6 35 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs aii ee redline Figure 6 34 A gap in the timeline To resolve a gap that is present in the timeline you either have to move the clips accordingly or fill the gap by adding another clip see section Adding Clips of a Certain Length to the Timeline on page 6 37 Additionally when a red line is shown you have the possibility at hand to close the gap automatically When positioning the mouse cursor over the red line of the timeline scale it will change its appearance to a hand and you can close it with a double cli
221. mming see sec tion Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Elements on page 6 43 outpoint handler inpoint handler Figure 6 42 In and outpoint handlers selected To select more than one handler perform the following e Select one of the desired handlers with a click of the mouse e Hold down the Ctrl key while clicking on another handler with the mouse e Perform this step for as many additional handlers as you want 6 45 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 46 After that you can click on one of the handlers and drag it to another position The rest of the selected handlers will act accordingly head and tail available for all selected timeline elements other i To trim several in or outpoint handlers there must be enough wise a trimming will not be possible With the selection of more than one handler of timeline elements you have some advanced possibilities for trimming at hand If you select the outpoint handler of one clip and the inpoint han dler of the neighboring clip to the right as can be seen in figure 6 42 on page 6 45 you can extend the length of one clip while shortening the length of the other at the same time Thus the timeline length will be maintained M S Figure 6 43 Selected in and outpoint handlers of neighboring clips If you select either two outpoint handlers or two inpoint handlers you can adjust the length of the two clips simultaneously ee
222. module First the steps to start the DVS software and the Edit Tool will be explained This is fol lowed by a beginner s tutorial that shows you how to work with the Edit Tool In a step by step description you will be instructed what to do to start your first project and how to perform some basic editing tasks 7D More detailed information about individual items or steps de i scribed here can be found in the other chapters of this user guide The chapter will be concluded with a description how to shut down the software 3 1 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 3 1 Starting the Program 3 2 This section provides you with a description how to get the Edit Tool started To start the program you have to do the following e Select from the START button menu of Windows on the submenu DVS the entry for the DVS software for example All Programs DVS DVS Fuze Alternatively you may also start the program via its icon on the desktop of Windows This will load the DVS software As the starting user interface the Edit Tool will be started automatically Because the DVS software is designed to run in full screen i mode to provide for an undistracted view on the video material and the task at hand the following shortcuts may be helpful To open the Windows Explorer Windows i E To open the Task Manager Ctrl Alt Del To switch to the Windows desk Windows 4 D top
223. mounts of video data and their corresponding meta data providing you with integrated browse search and management tools to retrieve data and gather information about them locally as well as via a network Additionally it can be used to preview clips and add them to the bin of the DVS software thus offering you even more pos 2 3 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 2 4 sibilities than a file manager Spycer is already integrated in the DVS software It can be accessed the same way as the other software mod ules and is thus not needed as a stand alone application For Fuze users it comes with the complete feature set and furthermore works seam lessly together with other available DVS products such as the DVS SAN The Configuration Tool For the configuration and setup of the whole DVS system and its soft ware you can use the Configuration Tool Here you can set up for ex ample the period for the automatic save function of the project file autosave as well as more software specific settings such as the bin properties Tools and Services Also part of the DVS software are various tools that can be used for a more basic configuration of the DVS system or may be of help during service and maintenance tasks e g monitoring and error diagnostics of the hard and software For instance among them you can find the defragmentation tool which is a process automatically started with the DVS software and running in the backgro
224. n page 8 5 The VTR task mode of the I O Tool uses project files different i from the ones usually saved via the DVS software Further in formation about this can be found in the Fuze I O Tool user guide 8 2 8 Update CineReel 8 6 The DVS CineReel is a transportable outdoor proof hard disk array es pecially designed for the on set use of digital film capturing The film material is directly stored on the hard disk array and when finished the array can be disconnected and transported to an editing site while the crew continues to capture on the set with an empty DVS CineReel At the editing site the hard disk array can be connected to a DVS system easily and the material will be instantly recognized Then it can be pro cessed right away The menu option Update CineReel on the Project menu checks whether a DVS CineReel is connected to the DVS system Then in the PVs The Menus bin a folder with the name CineReel is created and the film material on the hard disk array is referenced to this folder In the newly created folder the directory structure on the DVS CineReel is imitated and for each clip present on the hard disk array a bin clip will be available You can then work with the data immediately With the menu option Update CineReel no copying process i of any kind is initiated Only representations of the clips are created The DVS CineReel as a storage for video material will be too slow for r
225. n you can set the clips to show a virtual source timecode The DVS soft ware will then use the timecode specified as the source timecode offset as the virtual source timecode 2 6 2 About Keycode Keycode information stored in file headers can be used in the DVS soft ware as well When available in the file headers they will be given back during play out Keycode has its origin in the film world and is a variation of timecode to identify frames on a film roll It is a machine readable code printed at certain intervals along the edge of the camera negative film outside the perforations Besides containing data for instance about the film type the name of the manufacturer and the film stock it is used to number individual images i e it provides a reference number lt count gt lt offset gt for the image where the keycode is written The numbering available via keycodes can be used for example to match the film with a particular position of a data list e g EDL or cut list In the DVS software the keycode format normally is lt manufacturer ID and film type gt lt 6 digit film roll ID gt lt count gt lt offset gt Example KK217312 5235 04 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 2 7 About Timecode Frame Number Fields The DVS software provides various fields where data in timecode for mat is provided or an entry in such a format is necessary The timecode format is hh mm ss f hours minutes seconds and frame
226. n the context menu of a video clip in the timeline of the Edit Tool It opens a submenu where you can select other applications than the DVS soft ware to process your video data see also section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 55 To have an application available in this submenu you have to define and set it first This can be done with the Configuration Tool group External see Fuze Configurations user guide Please note that you have to set the appropriate program pa rameters if applicable in the Options entry field as well Please note that the Destructive export option is valid for all specified external applications If activated the source data will always be processed directly When saving the data in such a case with an external application the source material will be overwritten Export to application gt XnView Adobe Photoshop Figure 6 53 Accessing an external application This menu option will export the source material of the clip according to your settings made for this application in the Configuration Tool When a sequence processing is enabled each frame between i a set in and outpoint of the timeline will be sent to the external application However this applies to a single clip only If the in and outpoint are set outside of the clip where the menu option Export to application was called only the image sequence of the clip where the menu option was called will be sent
227. n the timeline how to perform cuts and how to set transitions Additionally because the timeline area is the most important part for your work with the Edit Tool it can be configured freely which will also be addressed here The chapter will be concluded with a description of how to finalize the timeline 6 1 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 1 Adding Clips to the Timeline 6 2 To begin an editing work you have to drag the clips to the video and or audio tracks of the timeline first You can add clips of different formats to the timeline because the DVS software works format independent and is capable of handling even high resolution film material You can take a clip directly from the contents area of the bin and add it to the tracks of the timeline Afterwards the length of the timeline will be indicated in the field directly below the timeline scale length of the timeline s in and outpoint see also section Setting an In and Out point for the Timeline on page 6 28 Figure 6 1 Timeline length indicator During the adding of clips to the timeline the clip will be visible i in the video or audio track of the timeline and it may react to certain elements of the timeline snapping mode to allow for an automated positioning Further information about the snap ping mode can be found in section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 34 When adding or moving clips in the timeline you have to h
228. nally in most position or length indicator fields you can enter a new value by either adding or subtracting the timecode or the frame amount from the given entry For this simply add the timecode or frame amount with a minus or plus sign to the given entry in the time code frame number field After that press Enter to confirm your entry Examples 1 23 2 05 jumpsto4 sec frame 4 00 00 04 04 if raster is in 24p 4 04 53 jumps to 1 sec frame 23 00 00 01 23 if raster is in 24p Switching the Notation Scales e g on timelines and position and length indicators can be switched from a display of the timecode notation to frame numbers and vice versa For this it is best to use the context menu of a timeco de frame number field e g the position field of the timeline cursor see section Controls on page 5 11 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 01 23 x Timecode _ Frames Figure 2 5 Context menu of a position field Select from the context menu the respective menu option This will change the position and length indicators of the respective software module to the selected notation A switching of the notation may effect the selected display type internal frames timecode will be used and vice versa see section Changing the Display Type on page 6 9 2 16 Getting Started This chapter provides you with some general information necessary to begin your work with the Edit Tool software
229. nd structure your video and audio material by sorting them to different folders This way you can perform a clip and project management In this section you can read what to do to create folders and how to administrate them For most of these tasks the context menu of the folders in the folder area is used It provides different folder related functions such as the creation of a new folder in the folder area or the renaming of an exis tent one Figure 4 10 Context menu of a folder in the folder area The Tool Area Creating Folders Via the context menu you can create a new folder manually in the fold er area of the bin e Call up the context menu on a folder in the folder area of the bin and select the menu option New folder This will create a new folder in the folder area It will be placed as a sub folder below the selected folder where the context menu was invoked After this you have to assign a name to the newly created folder e Enter the name of the folder via the keyboard and confirm it with the Enter key Then the new folder will be present in the folder area of the bin and you can use it to sort your audio and or video material into it see section Working with Clips in the Bin on page 4 16 Folders can also be created automatically with a drag and drop i procedure from a file manager see section Adding Clips to the Bin with a File Manager on page 4 6 Sorting Folders As soon as
230. ne With the Edit Tool and the timeline area configured to several video tracks you can perform a vertical editing in the timeline To perform a vertical editing the timeline area has to be config i ured to contain more than one video track see section Video and Audio Track Properties on page 6 6 Tracks can also be added removed via context menu see sec tion The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 55 and section The Context Menu of Audio Clips on page 6 63 The approach to work with several video tracks vertically in the timeline is different from the usual one of a horizontal editing in a timeline Then the various tracks of the timeline form a stack By placing different or differently edited timeline elements in other video tracks at the same position in the timeline you can change the contents for a play out at that position easily With vertical editing you still work with the video track s as usual i e horizontally But for instance in case you want to realize a temporary cutaway or to evaluate the visual outcome of different shots at a par ticular position in the timeline simply place the respective timeline ele ments in another track in the timeline The higher the track number the more priority is given to the respective track during a play out 6 59 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs Then with the help of enabling and disabling the respective tracks button M see section Muting
231. ne the timeline cursor will provide a dotted yellow line that in dicates where the selected image ends on the timeline Color value range of video clips indicating a full value range full With this black will be repre sented in 8 bit data by O and white by 255 See also head Color value range of video clips indicating a re stricted value range and thus headroom head With this black may be represented in 8 bit data by 16 and white by 235 See also full Material at the beginning of a clip that is avail able but neither used nor visible in the timeline of the DVS software due to an inpoint adjust ment trimming See also tail Appendix inpoint clip inpoint timeline insert mode keycode keyframing LUT look up table multi clip Odetics protocol RS 422 operator Starting point of a clip For video material either the first file on the storage or a first frame virtu ally set trimmed in the DVS software For au dio material either the first sample of a file or a virtually set trimmed inpoint in the DVS soft ware Starting point of a timeline It is either a user de fined inpoint or the very beginning of a timeline Timeline mode during your work with timeline elements When moving or adding clips in this mode no gaps will appear in the timeline and the current content of the timeline will be pre served A machine readable code printed along the edge of the camera negative f
232. ne with the mouse The properties area will be displayed right below the timeline area in stead of the audio tracks It will show you immediately the properties of the selected element where the context menu was invoked Effects Zoom amp Pan Rotation x Zoom Pan Width El Height LI Lock EJ T Filter Adaptive Filter real time Y Aperture Rotation LI Keyframing Figure 7 1 Video clip properties With the timeline element properties area visible in the user interface you can display the properties of every timeline element as soon as it is selected in the video track Thus fast editing operations can be per formed easily in the Edit Tool without laboriously calling the properties of each element again To view changes to an effect with the overlay of the control i area immediately make sure that the timeline cursor is posi tioned on the clip where the effect was added 7 2 PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 2 General Items of the Properties Area This section explains the items that are available in the properties area for all timeline elements e Depending on the type of element selected from the timeline i not all items may be available If they are dimmed they cannot be used in conjunction with this timeline element Once the timeline element properties are visible beneath the timeline you can find to the left side the following elements Dur 05 25 Modify before Modify after
233. ng of files frames can be configured in more detail on page 6 79 The combo box to the right of the Render path items determines if and where to create bin clips for the clips to be generated It lists the folders that are available in the bin and if one is selected the generated clip s will be automatically sorted into this folder of the bin If audio is ren dered these clips are registered as multi clips and further subfolders will be created each containing the individual clips used for the audio multi clip The option bin will create the bin clip s in the root folder of the bin whereas the option none prevents the creation of bin clips With the combo box Render from you can select whether the whole timeline A11 or the timeline stretch between the set in and outpoint only In Out should be rendered If In Out is selected but no in and outpoint is defined in the timeline the whole timeline will be ren dered The check box Disable gap rendering determines whether gaps in the timeline of the Edit Tool will be rendered or not It can be used in conjunction with still image formats only meaning it will be ignored when rendering to a container file format If deactivated gaps present in the timeline will be rendered to black frames when activated they will not be rendered and the respective frames will be left out from the image sequence With the combo box Generic timecode you select the timecode type that should be wr
234. ng system click the Minimize menu option on the menu of the program icon You can then for instance access other programs that are installed on your system 8 1 2 Exit 8 2 The menu option Exit ends the current Edit Tool session There is no way to end the Edit Tool alone When you exit the Edit Tool the whole DVS software will shut down Therefore it is recommended to finish all tasks such as a a play out op eration beforehand Otherwise the respective task may get interrupted This closes the DVS software After that you can for example shut down the system PVs The Menus 8 2 The Project Menu The menu Project contains the following menu options Ctri N Ctri 0O Cti S Ctrl Shift S Update CineReel Export as Ctri E z Ctri F Prerender all Extract files Exit Figure 8 3 The Project menu They are in detail described in the following sections 8 2 1 New The menu option New on the Project menu opens a new project file in the Edit Tool Once the new project file is loaded you can begin your new project for instance by adding clips to the bin 7 In the Edit Tool only one project file can be processed at a time i If you open an already saved project or activate the menu op tion New again the currently active project file will be closed However if you have already performed changes to the proj ect you will be asked by the program if you want to save the current
235. ngs items and possibilities of each effects operator can be found in chapter Timeline Element Properties on page 7 1 Then to create preset effects three ways are available 1 They can be created with a drag and drop procedure using the mouse 2 They can be created via the keyboard and assigned to function keys 3 They can be created with the help of the timeline element proper ties area The first two ways will be described in the following A description how to operate with preset effects in the timeline element properties area can be found in section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 and section Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area on page 7 14 Creating Preset Effects with the Mouse To create a preset effect with the mouse via drag and drop perform the following e If necessary activate the tab Effects in the tool area of the Edit Tool e Take the adjusted effect from the effects list of the timeline element properties and drag and drop it back to the effects pane in the tool area The effect can be dropped anywhere you like in the effects pane 4 23 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 24 Timelines MHollhwood 284 Figure 4 16 Drag and drop to create a preset effect This will create a subeffect under the respective effects operator in the effects pane By performing the above said repeatedly you can create as many preset effects as you need
236. ning Keyframes sssseeeeeieeeeeeeessrressrrrrrrrrrrne 7 27 7 8 6 Further Possibilities siicccct cxcdiviescctes rues 7 28 7 9 The Operator 1D LUT esccccccccecnererriererreee 7 30 Th Men s spoe ipn sane rea rer eaka rae a a nels 8 1 8 1 The Menu of the Program ICON cccccceeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeteeeeees 8 2 8 1 1 MINIMIZE 523236222 xbeded Sesliek LeeenetalesaeeeTeadestegetiend agacin 8 2 BMD EX eea ser eenosacesieuanoents 8 2 8 2 The Project Menu acs cass oes ete ass ciate tees 8 3 Contents 821 ee ee nee ee one 8 3 82 OPEM era eE eee en eee EE Fee R er 8 4 8 2 3 Recent SS aiaassiee dase a an aaa EAEE 8 4 824 Insert Projectoren irei a eet 8 5 8 295 AQOID ssena E EEE Er NE 8 5 8 216 DANG sehescdedadeer ae cedeced aioi iai eaea 8 5 82 7 Save ASen soia atana a e a eee 8 6 8 2 8 Update CineReel eesssssssssrsrsrrrrrrrrrrresessssssnrrrrnnnrnne 8 6 8 2 9 EXPO Aa aos de seth scene ttecta ete ge siete teeta 8 7 BO Finalizes caasececerecaekactedigscyso5h scsi aa aa 8 10 8 2 11 Prerender all ormsins aia a 8 11 8 2 12 Extract files eo er 8 11 8 2 13 EX eee a a E a Or 8 12 8 3 The BO Menu siareeiewsseseresarssertoneirsresatenivinetmaeerieene 8 13 83 UNA Ieee ree ete er taner ea E eS errr oes 8 13 oe J a e E E A PEE 8 13 8 4 TU BU Men siasii aE 8 14 841 Import Biireng rE 8 14 842 EXPOR BINE irera E deere 8 15 84 3 Cear BiN saiseteteed sa zal set unaa ti eigarin ai 8 15 SAA Check BIN
237. ns how to prepare the DVS software as well as the performance monitor for the measuring of the system s workload dur ing a play out operation PVs The Tool Area After starting the software and thus the Edit Tool the bin is by default activated in the tool area Then perform the following e Add at least one clip to the bin of the Edit Tool e Afterwards take this clip and add it to a video track of the timeline see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 For our example described here you may also set transitions i and or apply effects to the clip s in the timeline as long as they are not a subject to a prerendering see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 41 e Then select the tab Perform in the tool area of the DVS software The tool area switches to the performance tool of the DVS software If the controls of the performance monitor appear dimmed the performance monitor is disabled To use it you have to enable it first This can be done with the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide for more information Bin Effects Jobs Markers Perform Update CL 4q DYVSInto Reset Switched view to Show overall file IO WORKLOAD Date Time Type Timeline TC Frame File Mark All Clear Figure 4 26 The performance monitor After this the performance monitor is ready to assess the performance workload 4 41 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 42
238. o be generated For a list of the supported file formats see section Sup ported File Formats on page A 9 To the right of the File format com bo box you can find the button OPTIONS which provides depending on the selected format further configurations for the files to be generated Depending on the selected file format additional codec or file types may be available to determine bit depth and or byte order settings If pro vided by the format select from the File type combo box the desired The Timeline additional codec or file type A list of the file types can be found in the Fuze I O Tool user guide The items Files per folder allow you to limit the number of files that will be stored in one directory Further information about this can be found in section The Finalized Output Files per Folder on page 6 77 The Video 3D LUT items are optionally available They are identical to the 3D LUT settings available for the timeline A 3D LUT will not be ap plied automatically to the rendered files even if one is set for the output of the timeline In case you want to apply a 3D LUT most probably the same you have set for the timeline you have to select it here and ac tivate it with the respective check box For further information about how to do this refer to section Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File on page 6 17 SD Ze On the left side of the area to configure Scenic video you can find some buttons
239. o clips After the setting of a tran sition you can change its properties or if applicable prerender the tran sition see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 41 This section describes in the following the necessary procedures to ap ply transitions to cutting points on the timeline To apply a transition to a cutting point perform the following e Move the timeline cursor to the cutting point between the two clips with the respective controls e g EEEE EE see also section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 25 and section Con trols on page 5 11 This will make the button TRANS available in the user interface To set a transition there must be enough head and or tail avail i able of at least one clip to make a blending possible otherwise the button TRANS will be unavailable You can create the nec essary head and tail manually by adjusting the in and outpoint of clips see section Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Elements on page 6 43 If you are in the overwrite mode of the timeline the Edit Tool will create the head and tail for the transition automatically This means that parts of the clips will be moved for the transi tion Due to the moving of the clips the creation of a transition in the overwrite mode may cause gaps in the timeline More in formation about the overwrite mode can be found in section Overwrite Mode on page 6 31 e Select the button TRANS A tr
240. of clips by up to three criteria and the whole sorting will also be available when switching to the thumbnail view of the bin Sorting Clips into Folders As soon as clips are present in the bin you can sort them into previously created folders see section Creating Folders on page 4 15 to keep your project file in order and thus to perform a clip and project man agement Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 20 e To sort the clips into folders simply select the clips in the contents area of the bin and drag and drop them to the respective folder in the folder area They are then present in this folder and you can view them again in the contents area when the folder is selected from the folder area If you drag and drop the clips while the Ctrl key is pressed the clips will be copied instead of moved Preparing Clips for Editing Purposes To begin an editing process you have to use the clips of the bin and drag and drop them to the timeline of the Edit Tool If a clip is selected in the contents area of the bin when in the thumbnail view you can use the scrub bar below the thumbnail to preview the material and roughly select an inpoint for the respective clip The feature to select an inpoint can be enabled or disabled via i the Configuration Tool When disabled every time you add a clip to the timeline of the Edit Tool the full clip will be added to the timeline regardless of the set scrub bar cursor see F
241. of lines the keyframe will be created instead on the keyframing line first available from the top of the parameters list You can see the selected keyframing line and whether oth ers are on top of it more clearly with the check box Colors deactivated Then the keyframing lines are displayed without color cod ing except for the currently selected line which will be highlighted in blue as long as no other lines are on top of it The check boxes in front of the settings in the parameters list allow you to display or hide keyframing lines in the graph If the check box in front of a setting is activated its keyframing line is displayed if deactivated itis hidden With this you can display only those keyframing lines in the graph where a keyframing should be performed Additionally the settings entries of the Parameters list provide the fol lowing context menu Timeline Element Properties Parameters Linear Natural Spline Reset parameter Zoom Pan X Linear __ Natural Spline Reset parameter St Figure 7 16 Context menu of parameters list These settings determine the curving of the keyf raming line of the selected setting You can toggle between them With Natural Spline activated the keyframing line will be curved between the keyframes with Linear it will be straight from keyframe to keyframe To activate Natural Spline at least one additional keyframe has to be set on the keyframing line of the selected
242. of the DVS software which in turn may report new drops in the table 7 This button does not reset the drop table i of the performance monitor For this you have to use the button CLEAR of the table controls see section The Table Controls on page 4 39 Right below the chart controls you can find the status bar which will provide you with status messages about the operation of the perfor mance monitor 4 37 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs DYSInfo Reset Switched view to Show overall file I0 WORKLOAD Figure 4 23 Status message in the status bar The messages in the status bar inform you for instance about whether the performance monitor is enabled and ready to measure the work load 4 6 4 The Drop Table As soon as drops occur during your real time operation entries will ap pear in the drop table one for each drop that could be detected If the drop table is unavailable dimmed the performance i monitor is disabled To use it you have to enable it first This can be done with the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configura tions user guide Timeline TC Frame File Name Path N american_beauty_ VivFILM4K american_beau 0 50 display 09 29 299 american_beauty_ ViFILM4K american_beat display 10 00 american_beauty_ Vi FILM4K american_beat S 11 40 51 display 10 01 30 VVFILM4K sholhwoodsholly OV2408 11 40 51 display 10 02 holhwwood 00001 ViV FILM4K hollywood
243. og output settings c e 6 11 GUC osoitin aes Ae ake 6 16 aperture see sharpness application export 6 56 6 58 destructive ccecce 6 58 sequence processing e 6 58 applying effects 00 4 22 7 10 I l I l applying preset effects 4 25 7 15 archiving a project leccese 8 11 aspectratig sarsies 5 2 6 74 during Cropping n se 6 21 during finalizing ceecee 6 74 video overlay ee 5 2 6 13 zoom and pan siissh ccncecceeseriens 7 17 asterisk timecode accen 2 14 At start end ccc 6 8 attaching audio to video 6 49 6 55 6 64 audio a a 3 6 3 8 4 7 6 4 6 62 analog output n 6 16 Broadcast Wave ccce 2 12 channels cccceeeeee 6 15 6 76 channels embedded 6 12 6 16 during scrubbing cecce 6 17 fade in out ccccesccscessseecseeersnees 6 66 file format ccc A 11 A 13 MIXING oecsicsiin sincronia 6 15 MON ItOT NG occa 6 16 multi clip o 4 8 4 12 6 70 multiple channels 4 11 6 4 6 62 6 76 OUTPUT voihin pois 6 13 6 76 PEAKS aisnean 6 66 sample scc 6 14 A 3 A 4 Slip SYNC apts setosiiedtadeevecestones 6 14 source timecode sce 2 13 thumbnail of clip noses 4 11 VOIUME nsssssssssssesssresrsrressrrrrenne 6 65 Waveform nessssseseesiieeeeesrrereeeen 6 66 audio clip 2 tenccccentoastesectinatens 6 62 A 1 see also audio attach to video 6 49 6 55 6 64 change length naen 6 44 6 45 delete volume control point 6 63 file number display type
244. ol User Guide The Tool Area On the left side of the user interface directly below the menu bar you can find the tool area It shows you depending on the optional features available or the currently activated software module as well as task mode various tools that can be used during your work The different tools are provided as tabs to switch easily between them tool tabs e fi Effects Jobs Markers Perform Ea Figure 4 1 The tool area When you activate one of the inactive tool tabs the tool area will change its appearance and the respective tool will be displayed in the tool area Among the tools you can find for example the bin which provides initial access to the video material stored on your system or the performance monitor to assess the real time operation of the DVS system for example during a play out of the timeline This chapter describes the features of the tool area as well as the default tools available in the Edit Tool module in detail These default tools may also be available in the other software modules of the DVS software 4 1 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 1 Changing the Size of the Tool Area 4 2 Some tools may not be shown in full i e with all items or information displayed in the currently visible area of the tool area To get a better view on the individual tools or make items visible that are otherwise hidden you can change the size of the tool area For this perf
245. ole volume control line is set to 100 as shown in figure 6 54 on page 6 62 In this state there may be two volume control points avail able one at the beginning of the clip and one at its end Whether the start and end control points are available depends on whether the clip is trimmed in and or outpoint adjusted To tune the audio volume up or down you have to either use the al ready available volume control points or create new ones To create a new volume control point perform the following e Move the mouse cursor horizontally on the volume control line to the location where the control point should be added As soon as you can add a control point the mouse cursor changes to a cross e Then click with the mouse This will create a control point which can be moved in every direction on the audio clip The control points react to certain elements in the video and i audio tracks of the timeline snapping mode to allow for an automated positioning You can deactivate the snapping mode and activate a fine tuning mode by pressing the Shift key Fur ther information about the snapping mode can be found in section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 34 To delete a control point select from its context menu the menu option Remove control point see also section The Context Menu of Audio Clips on page 6 63 When you move the control point up or down you can turn up or down the volume of the respecti
246. on Delete prerendering on the context menu of a video clip see section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 55 Li To recognize the prerendered data belonging to one project easily it is recommended to store them project specific for each project separately For further information about this please re fer to section Notes on Project Management on page 2 11 Related to a prerendering of timeline elements are the Preren der all menu option on the menu Project see section Pre render all on page 8 11 and the section Real time Capability of Clips on page 4 13 section Jobs on page 4 29 and section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 41 2 5 Notes on Project Management To enable a real time play out of certain clips and operators e g tran sitions the DVS system may create extra files to enable a play out pre rendering For further information about prerendered data see section i Working with Prerendered Data on page 2 9 The location where these extra files are stored is saved project specific in the project file i e each project file can have a different directory for proxy data and the exact location will be stored in the project file Therefore it is suggested when working with prerendered material to store the project s data in a directory of its own DVS recommends when working with different projects to create for each project a proj ect specific director
247. on IMAGE you can activate the view of the thumbnails again information available that can be set via the Configuration Tool as well see above These texts will then appear to the right of the thumbnail as shown in figure 4 12 on page 4 17 i For the thumbnail view of the contents area there are also text 4 2 2 Adding Clips to the Bin 4 6 Before you can begin to work with clips in the Edit Tool you have to fill the bin with clips available on the system There are several ways to fill the bin with clips of video and audio 1 You can open a standard file manager e g the Windows Explorer and drag and drop the clips either a file within a direc tory or the directory itself to the contents area of the bin 2 you can use the menu option Add clip on the context menu of the bin s contents area or the menu option Add clip of the Project menu to fill the bin with contents 3 you can drag and drop contents to the bin with the help of Spycer the content management software module or 4 you can capture clips with the I O Tool software module of the DVS software All these procedures will be explained in this section The DVS software works with standard computer files Video i and audio data should be stored on the designated storage only e g the system s main storage or a DVS SAN Other storage locations may be too slow for real time operations Furthermore it is strongly recommended to use the main
248. on area The button area of the bin contains the view but tons that can be used to select whether the clips in the contents area shall be seen as thumbnails with text or with their text information only This section explains all features provided by the bin of the DVS soft ware in detail 4 2 1 Configuring the Bin 4 4 With the bin you can perform a clip and project management You can structure the clips by sorting them to different folders and you can pre view the clips as well as access additional information via their text dis play in the bin To serve all these functions at once you can change and configure the layout of the bin freely The areas of the bin can be arranged horizontally or vertically The appearance of clips in the contents area can be changed Both procedures are explained in this section Changing the Layout of the Bin To provide for example for a better view on the material in the bin the areas of the bin the folder and the contents area can be arranged hor izontally or vertically via the title bar of the folder area For this do the following e Call up the context menu of the bin s title bar usually with a right click of the mouse Folders xX Vertical split __ Horizontal split X Figure 4 5 Context menu of title bar The Tool Area e Select the horizontal or vertical appearance of the bin from the con text menu The context menu to change the layout of the b
249. onfigurations user guide With the fields regarding the REET 1920 x 1035 resolution of the rendering you fememe 30 interlaced set the actual output resolution GAE Odd fields of the clip to be rendered and generated As the fields indicate you can alter the resolution to any for mat you like and the new clip will be present in this resolution Use the Resolution fields to change the height and width of the clip The Frame rate entry field will be evaluated if a file format is selected that stores source timecode information in its header e g dpx Then the specified timecode will provide the entered frame rate as the source timecode s frame rate Use the combo box for the field mode to select whether your material to be generated should be interlaced progressive or segmented frames From the combo box Dominance select the dominance of your inter laced material The Odd fields value starts with the second video field of the interlaced image while the value Even fields begins with the first video field Via the entry field Aspect ratio you can change the aspect ratio of your image content and thus compress or stretch the image The aspect ratio value should be entered as the value of the x axis divided by the y axis Aspect ratio x y The Auto scale and Original aspect ratio items enable you to scale and resize your original video material Both settings are concerned Dvs The Timeline with the video format of t
250. ool User Guide PVs 1 5 New in the Edit Tool 1 8 The following lists the most important features and functions that were new in the latest versions of the Edit Tool mzn Please note that the features and functions mentioned may be i part of optional packages For further information about new features please refer also to the release notes of the DVS software New in Version 3 5 3D stereoscopic subtitles for DCI Mastering New in Version 3 3 Timeline tracks can be added or removed via context menu For output finalizing the reel name can be configured in the Con figuration Tool Support of subtitles for DCI Mastering MPEG Interop as well as CPL only creation via the digital cinema delivery tool 3D single stream formats for finalizing and the digital cinema deliv ery tool for intermediate states towards a DCP New in Version 3 2 Support of several new file formats Finalizing of mono audio files Introduction of a system specific Signing Key for the DCI Mastering New in Version 3 1 Support of 3D material and stereoscopic digital cinema packages New in Version 3 0 Clipwise rendering for finalizing Frames fields display mode Support of source timecode for audio in the timeline Enhanced keyboard shortcuts Basics The Edit Tool is one of the software modules of the DVS software and thus part of the software package for Fuze This chapter prov
251. ool area and the individual tools see chapter The Tool Area on page 4 1 To the right of the tool area you can find the control ar ea In the Edit Tool this area is used to pre and review your current project At the top you can find the video overlay where you can see the video material Below the video overlay a scrub bar of the timeline is avail able In contrast to the timeline in the timeline area where you can zoom in and out the scrub bar always shows the complete timeline of the project Below the scrub bar the controls are located to play out and move within your current project The control area will be de scribed in chapter The Control Area on page 5 1 In the timeline area you can find the video and audio tracks Most of the editing tasks are performed here for example by cutting and arranging clips The time line area can be configured freely and thus be adapted to your individual needs This area and how to work with projects in the timeline are explained in chapter The Timeline on page 6 1 The user interface provides at its bottom a task bar where you can switch between the different software modules of the DVS software The task bar is available in most modules and you can easily start and switch between them It will be described in more detail in sec tion The Task Bar on page 2 7 2 3 The Task Bar The user interface provides at its bottom a task bar where you can switch between the d
252. oon as a value is con firmed by pressing the Enter key The Timeline You may also use the sliders at the bottom and to the left to change the cropping Furthermore you can select the cropping borders as well as the cropped image to adjust the cropping manually The sliders as well as the entry fields and if applicable the aspect ratio will be altered ac cordingly gt _ r Figure 6 23 Adjusting the cropping manually with the mouse The button CENTER is a toggle button Once activated the cropped im age will be centered in the representation and locked there With this when changes are applied to the cropping the cropped part will always stay in the middle of the image Once everything is set as desired confirm your selection with the OK button at the bottom of the Timeline cropping window The button CANCEL will close the window for the cropping settings without confirming any of the alterations However the cropping will be in effect for the timeline only if the check box Video Cropping in the Options area of the Timeline output settings window is activated Video Cropping x Cropping Figure 6 24 Activation of the cropping of the timeline Then the configured cropping will be applied to the whole timeline of the Edit Tool The color value of the black bars added to the timeline via i cropping and played out via the DVS system depends on the setting for the color space range spe
253. or down the value In most of the above mentioned cases you can in or decrease the step ping value that will be used for the adjustments by pressing the Ctrl key to increase or the Shift key to decrease the stepping value Fur thermore with a double click of the mouse on a slider field you can on most sliders reset its setting to its default value 7 5 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 4 Closing the Timeline Element Properties 7 6 The timeline element properties can be closed the same way they are called After this the view of the audio tracks will be restored To close the timeline properties area perform the following e Double click a timeline element in the timeline This will close the properties area and afterwards the audio tracks will be visible again in the user interface of the Edit Tool PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 5 Properties of a Transition As soon as a transition is selected in the timeline its properties are dis played in the timeline element properties area right below the timeline area If the properties area is not visible in the Edit Tool you have to display it first see section Accessing the Timeline Element Properties on page 7 2 By default a transition is set to the wipe Crossfade This can be changed via the properties of a transition easily Transition type Dur 01 00 Figure 7 3 Transition properties In the properties of the transition you can sel
254. orm the following e Move the outer right edge of the tool area to the left or to the right with the mouse Then you will be able to view for example the thumbnails of clips pres ent in the bin together with all their text information Name a Resolutior Color dept Colormod pir Aspect rati Framerate Audio cha ame Figure 4 2 Adjusting the size of the tool area horizontally If you pull the right edge completely to the left the tool area i will no longer be visible and thus can be turned off If you pull the right edge completely to the right the control area will be hidden and you can see horizontally the contents of the respec tive tool in full Additionally you can alter the size of the tool area vertically e Move the lower edge of the tool and control area which is also the upper edge of the timeline area up or down with the mouse to enlarge or reduce the areas Figure 4 3 Adjusting the size of the tool area vertically The vertical size of the tool and control area will adjust itself automati cally which will also affect the size of the timeline area see section Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area on page 6 5 for further in formation PVs The Tool Area 4 2 The Bin After starting the DVS software and thus the Edit Tool the bin is by de fault activated in the tool area If the bin is not displayed in the tool area of the Edit Tool select the tab Bin to activate it
255. ormat MPEG 1 mpg 3 x 8 bitRGBor8 bit File format for the compression of video and MPEG 2 YUV compressed audio audio MPEG 4 mp4 3 x 8 bit RGB or8 bit File format for the compression of video and YUV compressed audio as well as other media types Based on and or audio the QuickTime file format QuickTime mov Various e g RGB or Video file format that supports various file YUV either com storage formats either compressed or un pressed or uncom compressed Proprietary streaming video pressed audio technology developed by Apple For finaliz ing the available file types depend on wheth er Hardware finalize support is activated or deactivated 2K resolutions or above are sup ported when File type is not set to Quick Time Conversion Windows wmv 3 x 8 bit RGB com Video file format that supports various file Media pressed audio storage formats Proprietary streaming video technology developed by Microsoft Only compressed variants are supported 1 A finalizing can only be performed compressed 2 Available for loading only 3 Available for finalizing only Cannot be captured Furthermore the DVS software supports different variants of MXF e g MXF OP Atom MXF OP 1a and P2 extension mxf as well as DV DIF extension dv files Both are container formats for audio and or video material They are implemented with the following com pression codecs i Bi io Bit
256. ors For example you can assign the F2 key to a primary color correction as well as to a zoom and pan effect each providing the correct effect settings for this re spective effects operator when applied to a clip G The assigned function keys are valid for the selected effects op The assignment of function keys for preset effects can also be adjusted manually The function key has to be stated last in the name of the preset effect in square brackets to enable it as a keyboard shortcut for a preset effect For example by chang ing a preset effect name to lt name string gt F2 you will assign the function key F2 to it 4 3 3 Using Preset Effects When preset effects are available in the effects pane of the Edit Tool they can be applied to clips in the timeline easily line with the help of the timeline element properties area see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 and section Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area on page 7 14 i Effect settings can also be transferred to other clips in the time N e A preset effect can be applied the same way as any default effect available in the effects pane of the tool area Simply drag and drop it to the effects list of a clip s timeline element properties as described in section Adding Effects on page 7 10 The predefined settings of this effect will be applied to the clip s timeline element properties right away You can also us
257. ou can for exam ple set up the period for the automatic save func tion of the project file autosave as well as more software specific settings such as the bin properties More information about the Configuration Tool as well as various other configurations that can be per formed can be found in the Fuze Configurations user guide For a more detailed description of all basic software modules as i well as other parts of the software together with references to their descriptions please refer to section Overview of the Software Structure on page 2 2 2 7 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 2 8 Additionally you can find at the bottom right of the task bar several items which will provide you with information about the currently load ed project the duration of its timeline in total and the set video output format for the timeline ESFE e project information Figure 2 3 Project information The timeline s duration shows you the duration of all clips present in the timeline tracks and depends on the currently selected video output ras ter frame rate Furthermore to the right of the task bar you can find some status mes sages They will be displayed as soon as project relevant tasks are per formed for instance when a project is loaded or saved 4 1i status and help messages Config Figure 2 4 Status and help messages of the DVS software As well this part of the task bar
258. ouse to the right or left allows you to zoom in and out of the graph Alternatively instead of the but ton you can also use the keyboard combination Shift Ctrl then move the mouse The zooming will be made on the current viewing position In case you want to view a particular detail you can hold down the Ctrl key and draw a yellow rectangle with the mouse around it in the graph Once the mouse button is released the view of the graph will be adjusted to the width of the drawn rectangle When zoomed into the graph a scroll bar will be available at the top of the graph which allows you to change the viewing position on the graph s timeline You can also hold down the keyboard keys Shift Alt and move the mouse to the right or left to change the viewing position As long as the graph has the focus you can reverse a zooming and step between previous views on the clip s timeline with the keyboard keys Page Up and Page Down The viewing zooming can also be set back to the full view of the clip s timeline again For this you have to use the context menu of the graph Timeline Element Properties et Marker Position Reset Zoom x Timecode Display _ Frames Display X Enable Tooltips Figure 7 18 Context menu of the graph On the graph s context menu select the menu option Reset Zoom to reset the view of the timeline Furthermore the context menu provides the possibility to switch the notation of th
259. out drops that occurred during this session only when the performance monitor is enabled Then the report contains information about for example the date and time when the drop occurred or about the file that was the 4 33 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs cause for this drop If the performance monitor is disabled the log file will be written but provide no information about drops that occurred In some cases it may not be able to provide information about i Drops are reported by the real time core of the DVS software the file name and or path Only the last ten reports will be stored Individual frames missing in an image sequence clip i e im age files that are not present on the storage at all are not reg istered as drops You can check the consistency of your material added to the bin with the menu option Check Bin on the Bin menu see section Check Bin on page 8 15 and sec tion Consistencies of Clips on page 6 57 You can retrieve the location of files where drops occurred also by setting timeline markers with the help of the drop table or its controls see section The Drop Table on page 4 38 and section The Table Controls on page 4 39 This section explains the basic usage and the items of the performance monitor 4 6 1 The Chart 4 34 The chart of the performance monitor provides a graphical representa tion of the measured performance of the system During play out or re cord
260. ownconvert filter with the sharpness and details of the pictures further enhanced Software Filter rendering With this setting the best possible filter is se lected It provides a software based sophisti cated algorithm for all settings on the operator Zoom Pan However if this fil ter is used the clip has to be prerendered prior to a play out see section Prerende ring of Timeline Elements on page 6 41 With the Aperture items to the right of the Filter combo box you can sharpen or blur the image The slider and its entry field to the right find their main usage when Moir effects occur in your images Moir ef fects are interferences in your video output signal usually caused by fine black and white image details in your video clip such as striped or checked patterns If such interferences in your output occur use the Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs slider and pull it to the left or right until the jittering or other interfer ences disappear Slider Slider Position Result Factor or Factor Range Aperture left blur lt 1 right sharpen 37 Me The Aperture slider is not available for certain filters selected J via the combo box Filter With the Rotation slider and its entry field at the bottom of the settings pane you can rotate the clip full circle 180 By dragging the slider to the left or entering a negative value in the entry field you can rotate
261. p 29 97 75 cording 16 audio 720p 23 98 25 90 channels will gener also in 10 bit ate 16 individual MXF files f i 720p 29 97 110 one erauale also in 10 bit 720p 50 115 1080p 23 98 24 1080i p 25 120 720p 59 94 145 1080i p 29 97 1080p 23 98 24 175 also in 10 bit 720p 50 185 1080i p 25 all also in 10 bit 720p 59 94 220 1080i p 29 97 all also in 10 bit 1 If not mentioned otherwise all in 8 bit 4 2 2 2 Observe the limitations as indicated For example for DVCAM either four 4 or no zero 0 audio channels have to be selected Audio only File Formats The following audio only file formats are supported Format Name Baten Description xtension AIF aif Audio interchange format Platform inde AIFF aiff pendent file format for sound Capable of storing multiple mono or stereo channels BWF rf64 Broadcast wave format Platform indepen wav dent file format for sound Extension of the Wave format capable of storing multiple mono or stereo channels together with me tadata and enabling file sizes of more than 4 GB Wave wav File format for digital audio waveform data under Windows Capable of storing multiple mono or stereo channels Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 4 1D LUT Files A one dimensional look up table 1D LUT file defines values for color and or gamma correction Depending on the color depth for each in put value the
262. pe can be used to evaluate the color distribution of the output image ac curately The Control Area YUV Parade The YUV parade displays graphically the distribution of the compo nents Y U and V separately The Y graph is shown on the left side while the color difference signals U and V are displayed in the middle and to the right As with the RGB parade the output image is evaluated line by line and for each line the distribution is shown Figure 5 9 The YUV parade However because U and V can take on negative as well as positive val ues their graphs usually are distributed around a center line It can be found in the middle of the YUV parade because in digital video an off set of 128 for 8 bit data is added to U and V to get rid of the negative value In case the output image is black and white only U and V would be zero 128 resulting in a flat line in the middle of their graphs The more the color saturation of an output image increases the more the two graphs would be dispersed Values of U greater than 50 in the graph indicate positive values and blue hues while values of less than 50 indicate yellow hues and negative values The same applies to V with the exception that values greater 50 would indicate red hues and values less than 50 cyan hues Regarding the luma signal Y a value of zero indicates black while a value of 100 represents white Neverthe less especially when working with YUV a reserved headroom fo
263. perators de veloped by DVS are explained in the later sections of this chap ter For a description of operators developed by third parties please refer to their respective documentation To view changes to the effects immediately with the overlay of the control area make sure that the timeline cursor is positioned on the clip currently selected in the timeline Timeline Element Properties With the check boxes in front of the effects operators available in the effects list you can enable or disable effects If a check box in front of an effect is activated it is enabled if it is deactivated it is disabled Thus you can easily evaluate the outcome of an individual effect by compar ing it with the original image or other applied effects Effects Zoom Pan enabled effect SJE AM Zoom Pan 1D LUT Subtitling disabled effect Zoom Pan Figure 7 8 Enabling or disabling effects of a video clip If you need an operator to be applied to a limited range of frames of a clip only you have to edit the clip with hard cuts beforehand because the applied effects are valid for a whole timeline clip always Some effects operators or combination of operators are not i real time capable Prior to a play out their application has to be rendered see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 41 The sequence of all added effects to a clip that are listed in the effects list is important a
264. project When you start a new project file the autosave function is disabled because of a missing file name for the project The autosave function automatically saves your project file after a certain period of time for backup purposes see Fuze Config urations user guide for more details To enable the autosave function you have to save the project file first and thus assign a name to it 8 3 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs The VTR task mode of the I O Tool uses project files different i from the ones usually saved via the DVS software Further in formation about this can be found in the Fuze I O Tool user guide 8 2 2 Open The Open menu option opens the standard dialog window of the operating system for the selection of a file In this dialog window select the project file that you want to open in the Edit Tool File extensions cp Project file cp autosave Automatically saved intermedi ate situation backup cp Backup file of old project file During loading the bin and thus the timeline will be checked for incon sistencies i e it is tested whether the first and the last frame of each clip present in the bin is actually available on the storage iJ Missing frames will be substituted during a play out with the Edit Tool by a standard image see section Consistencies of Clips on page 6 57 Then it is recommended to perform a more accurate testing of the bin with the m
265. pull it completely to the right the control area will be hidden and the contents of the activated tool will be displayed in full To prepare the bin for a project you have to fill it with audio and or vid eo material first There are several ways to do this The best and most informative way is to use Spycer see section Adding Clips to the Bin Using Spycer on page 4 9 but they can also be added by using a file manager which is more appropriate when using the Edit Tool for the first time The DVS software works with standard computer files Video i and audio data should be stored on the designated storage only e g the system s main storage or a DVS SAN Other storage locations may be too slow for real time operations Furthermore it is strongly recommended to use the main stor age for video and audio as well as project related data only Save other data on the system disks e Open a Windows file manager for example the Windows Explorer with the keyboard combination Windows a E e Inthe file manager select a video file either a file within a directory or the directory itself on the storage where the video data is stored For a list of the supported file formats see section Support J ed File Formats on page A 9 e Drag and drop the selected video file directory to the contents area of the bin with the help of the mouse Getting Started v E co Name a Size Type a E Hol
266. r or pillarboxing The button is located at the top left side of the timeline area and after pressing it the Timeline out put settings window is displayed on the screen At the bottom of this window you can find further optional settings in the Options area To the right you can find the settings to crop the vid eo output The other items available in the Options area are explained in i their respective sections for an overview see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 11 The Timeline Video Cropping i Cropping Figure 6 19 Items to crop the timeline With these items you can adjust and crop the output image for exam ple to add black bars to your video output A click on the button CROP PING opens the following settings window Timeline cropping CF Figure 6 20 Window to crop the video output During configuring the cropping will appear in the video over lay and at the video output of the DVS system However this is temporary and for monitoring reasons only To apply the set tings to the timeline the cropping has to be activated with the check box Video Cropping in the Options area of the Time line output settings window see below At the top of the Timeline cropping window you can find items to control the aspect ratio of the cropped image __ Hold aspect ratio Figure 6 21 Aspect ratio controls 6 21 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs
267. r all components should be observed Waveform The waveform video scope is similar to the RGB parade It displays graphically the distribution of the color components red green and blue RGB of an output image For this the image is evaluated line by line and for each the color distribution is displayed 5 7 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 8 Figure 5 10 The waveform The horizontal scale of the scope represents the image s horizontal di rection while the vertical axis shows the RGB levels The color compo nents are drawn in their respective colors The more scan lines of an image provide the same color at the same horizontal location the more saturated the color will be in the graph In case different colors are lo cated at the same position with the same intensity they would be add ed in the graph until the respective position shows white DVS The Control Area 5 3 The Scrub Bar of the Control Area Below the video overlay a scrub bar of the timeline is available Figure 5 11 Timeline scrub bar In contrast to the timeline of the timeline area where you can zoom in and out see chapter The Timeline on page 6 1 the scrub bar of the control area always shows the complete timeline of the loaded project You can use the scrub bar for overview purposes or to move within your project The scrub bar of the control area provides several features for example different colors indicating
268. r file Entry Parameters selections or entries made in the program it may also indicate a file syntax or contents of a file Key An individual key or a key combination on a keyboard Keyboard Shortcuts To perform options or procedures with the keyboard often requires a si multaneous pressing of two keys Example Ctrl F1 If this is given hold down the Ctrl key and press simultaneously the F1 key 1 5 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 1 6 Screenshots The screenshots shown in this documentation may differ from the user interface s displayed on your system They may have been taken for example from previous pre release software versions or from other systems with a similar user interface However they should contain the items required to understand the described actions 3D Stereoscopy and Digital Cinema The items available to create and use 3D stereoscopic material or digital cinema content are not described in this manual These are for exam ple the menu option Digital Cinema Delivery Tool the menu option Load KDM the tab DC reels the Stereoscopic output setting s as well as any other DC CPL subtitle stream video or eye con cerned item Descriptions of them can be found Inthe Fuze DCI Mastering supplement user guide Inthe Fuze 3D Stereoscopy supplement user guide These documents can be accessed via the so
269. r individual needs with the Configuration Tool of the DVS software see Fuze Configurations user guide for more in formation Additionally you can turn on or off the tooltips of the clips in the time line For this call up the context menu on either a video or audio clip and select the menu option Enable tooltip see also section The Con text Menu of Video Clips on page 6 55 or section The Context Menu of Audio Clips on page 6 63 for further information The tooltips can also be enabled or disabled via the Configura i tion Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide for more infor mation 6 2 5 Changing the Display Type To the right of the thumbnails combo box you can find the display type combo box where you can set the way position information are dis played by clips in the Edit Tool The position information of clips are shown for example in their text information after they were added to the timeline top left and top right see section The Clip s Information on page 6 54 When you select the arrow to the right of the combo box a drop down list will be available where you can set the display type 6 9 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide Internal timecode Y Internal frames Internal timecode Source timecode File number Figure 6 10 List of the display types From this list select the display type that should be used in the software Selection Meaning Intern
270. r project The timeline cur sor will move accordingly Alternatively you may use the keyboard shortcuts Left Arrow Right Ar row or 3 4 With this button you can play out the timeline backwards i e it will start a reverse play out Once activated the button changes its appearance to its active state To stop the reverse play out you have to click it again Alternatively you may use the key board shortcut J to start a reverse play out and Space K Shift K to stop it When increasing or decreasing the speed of the play out see section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 6 the current speed if negative will be indicated in frames per second fps in this button Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs Insert Review With this button you can start a play out of the timeline After activation the button changes its ap pearance to its active state UM To stop the play out you have to click this button again Alternatively you may use the keyboard shortcuts Space 5 to start or Space K Shift K to stop a play out When increasing or decreasing the speed of the play out see section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 6 the current speed if positive will be indicated in frames per second fps in this button R To view your project on an additionally i connected monitor you have to configure the output format video raster of the timeline accordingly see section How to Con
271. r this query with YEs the same procedure as to export a bin will be initiated see section Export Bin on page 8 15 8 4 4 Check Bin During the loading of a project file and the import of a bin the DVS software performs a limited test regarding the availability of the clips present in the bin It is tested whether the first and the last frame of each video clip is available on the storage Via the Check Bin menu op tion you can check your bin and thus your timeline more thoroughly for errors and inconsistencies If the first and or last frame of a clip is missing you will be in i formed about this the same way as described in this section After the selection of the menu option Check Bin the DVS software verifies that each frame of each clip and each audio file is present on the storage If inconsistencies are found i e missing files you will get the following error message Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs Bin consistency check No source material found for the following Clips nN lt list of clips gt Delete these clips Ignore Search material Figure 8 8 Error message of inconsistencies in the bin The error message provides a detailed list of all clips that could not be verified With the button DELETE THESE CLIPS you can then delete the faulty clips from your bin or you can proceed to the inconsistent bin with the button IGNORE DVS software by a standard image see section Consistencie
272. rame file frame number If the 20 000th frame is reached the Edit Tool will again create a subdirectory Clip 0001 in the selected path and start the generation of the next 20 000 frames and so on until the project is rendered completely ac cording to your settings The file frame numbering can be configured with the name i options items see section Name Options on page 6 79 Normally the count will start with o with the amount of digits depending on the amount of frames to be finalized The Timeline The matching audio files will be stored in these subdirectories as well meaning the audio files will be appropriately cut to match the length of video stored in this folder The place holder lt Channe1s gt in the file names of the audio files above indicates the selected audio channels of the area Channels when individual mono or stereo files are created Then for each enabled check box one file will be created When a file with multiple channels is generated the lt Channels gt place holder will be left out When video still image sequence or audio clips are finalized or record ed an additional file with the name SequenceInfo xml is created in the main directory of the clip It is used by the DVS software to enable a recognition of multi clips with different Files per folder settings for example during a drag and drop procedure to the bin z For further information about multi clips see section
273. re performed virtually and at all times your orig inal material will never be altered This section describes how to work with the timeline of the Edit Tool in general 6 4 1 Moving Clips within the Timeline 6 34 To arrange the clips in the desired sequence on the timeline as they should be played out in the end you may have to move clips within the timeline which is very easy with the Edit Tool Simply select a clip and drag it with the mouse to the desired position on the timeline Although the following is shown with video clips the same ap i plies to audio clips as well Alternatively clips can also be moved with the keyboard see section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 6 The Timeline ats ax fLandsea p Figure 6 33 Moving a clip With the insert mode activated if a clip is moved to a cutting point the clip will be inserted there while the rest of the material moves back wards in the timeline If it is dropped in the middle of another clip this clip will be divided and its rest as well as the rest of the track s contents will be moved to the end of the inserted clip This behavior depends on the selected mode of the timeline With the overwrite mode activated the moved clip will over write the contents of the track from the point of the insertion on See section Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 30 for more details When the moved clip comes close to certain ele
274. re you can change the clip s properties e Some clip properties can only be altered if the clip is not already i present in the timeline Furthermore the properties of audio multi clips can only be changed by individually altering the properties of each audio clip in the provided bin subfolder of the audio multi clip The window of the clip properties can also be opened from a clip added to the timeline see section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 55 The properties of several clips can be changed in a single step by selecting the clips in the bin and then opening their proper ties The description of the Clip properties window is not part of this user guide It is in detail described in the Fuze Configurations user guide Deleting Clips To delete a clip from the contents area of the bin perform the following e Call up the context menu on the clip that you want to delete in the contents area of the bin and select the menu option Delete fe Alternatively you may also select the clip and press the key Del on your keyboard After this a warning message will appear on the screen e If you want to delete the clip from the bin as well as all its represen tations present in the timeline confirm the warning message This will delete the selected clip either video or audio from the con tents area of the bin If the clip was already added to the timeline its representations ther
275. respectively While trimming the outpoint you will notice a blue line above the se lected clip i head tail indicator Figure 3 10 Display of original length of clip This line shows the original length of the clip You can use it to deter mine easily how much tail is available to for example create a transi tion e Once sufficient tail is available release the outpoint handler and drop it With this you have manipulated the outpoint of the clip The same way you can of course change inpoints as well You cannot change the in and outpoint of a clip beyond the limits of its original material on the storage indicated by the head tail indicator Clips in the timeline can also be trimmed by cutting them with the button EDIT and afterwards deleting the not required part of the clip The cut will be applied to the position of the timeline cursor If a track is locked no cutting will be per formed Next we want to add a transition to the cut between clip B and clip A on the timeline PVs Getting Started 3 2 6 Adding a Transition to the Timeline Once at least two clips are present in the video track of the timeline you can add a transition between the clips In our example we want to apply a transition to the cutting point between clip B and clip A For this perform the following e Via the controls EE GE or the keyboard shortcuts S jump forward and A jump backward you can move the timeline cur
276. rks Moving via the Scrub Bar of the Control Area In contrast to the timeline of the timeline area the scrub bar of the con trol area always shows the complete timeline of the loaded project It can also be used to move within your project scrub bar with cursor The Timeline Figure 6 29 The scrub bar There are several ways to move within your project with the scrub bar of the control area Select the scrub bar cursor HESS with the mouse and move it to the left or right to the desired position Click anywhere below or above the scrub bar to position the scrub bar cursor there instantly Click on a position on the scrub bar outside the visible part of the timeline to move the scrub bar cursor there instantly You can also move the visible part of the timeline on the scrub bar to the left or right with the mouse to select another part of the timeline in the timeline area for viewing Further information about the scrub bar can be found in sec tion The Scrub Bar of the Control Area on page 5 9 Other Ways to Move within the Timeline For a frame accurate moving or to play out and review the timeline you may use the controls of the control area of the Edit Tool With them you can jump to cutting points and timeline markers or step one frame for or backward They are in detail described in section Controls on page 5 11 Of course via a play out you can also move within the timeline There
277. row or 3 4 when the timeline has the focus 7 8 4 Setting Keyframes Keyframes for an effect setting can be set easily in the keyframe editor A single click on the respective keyframing line of the setting in the graph will create a keyframe mouse cursor to E i n set a keyframe E keyframe Figure 7 22 Creating keyframes Usually the keyframe will be created on the keyframing line of the set ting that is either selected or available first in the parameters list see section The Parameters List on page 7 21 To create keyframes you can also use the button ADD below the graph It will create keyframes on all visible keyframing lines at the current lo cation of the timeline cursor Additionally with the menu option Add Keyframe of the graph s con text menu see figure 7 18 on page 7 25 you can create a keyframe for the setting that is currently selected in the parameters list The key frame will be created at the position of the timeline cursor 7 8 5 Positioning Keyframes Once a keyframe is created it can be moved and positioned freely with the mouse 05 00 p 75 Figure 7 23 Positioning keyframes 7 27 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs During the moving of a keyframe with the mouse its position and set ting is displayed on the screen allowing you to accurately position and set the keyframe Each keyframing line represents a setting of the effect Thus to set and adjust a keyfra
278. rtion point The added clip no 2 will be placed here while the rest of clip no 1 is over written When moving or adding clips in the timeline with the overwrite mode activated gaps may occur in the timeline Further information about gaps and how to close them can be found in section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 34 6 3 4 Muting and Locking Tracks 6 32 The video and audio tracks of the Edit Tool can be muted and or locked independently i e they can be enabled or disabled for a play out as well as for an editing work If a track is muted its content will not be played out if it is locked no editing work such as a cutting of clips can be performed in this track To lock or mute a track you have to use the buttons available in the ar eas right in front of the tracks The button M mutes the track bar it PVs The Timeline from an output while the button L locks it bar it from an editing work master mute lock e 1 Timeline1 lock button Figure 6 32 Buttons to lock and mute tracks With the M and L buttons to the left side of the timeline scale you can mute and lock all video and audio tracks with one click master mute lock Afterwards you may use the mute and lock buttons of in dividual tracks to enable them for the respective work again This may be especially useful when working with a lot of tracks When locking tracks and thus preserving them from c
279. s 1 2 Target Group 1 4 To use this user guide and the Edit Tool correctly you should have ex perience in PC handling and be familiar with the hardware handling of a video system If you want to use the software to its full potential you should also have extensive knowledge in the field of digital video Furthermore to use the DVS system in connection with other equip ment e g a VTR you should know how to handle this equipment PVs Introduction 1 3 Conventions Used in this User Guide The following typographical conventions will be used in this documen tation e Texts preceded by this symbol describe activities that you must per form in the order indicated Texts preceded by this symbol are parts of a list Texts preceded by this symbol are general notes intended to fa li cilitate work and help avoid errors You must pay particular attention to text that follows this symbol to avoid errors Texts enclosed by quotation marks are references to other man uals guides chapters or sections Window Text in bold with single quotation marks indi cates a window name BUTTON Text in small caps and bold indicates a push but ton Group Menu Text in italic and bold indicates either a group name menu name or options in a menu list Menu Option In the specified group or menu select the stated item Item Text in bold only stands for other labeled items of the user interface File Directory structure o
280. s i Missing frames will be substituted during a play out with the of Clips on page 6 57 If you are opening a project created on another system you can also search for the missing material by altering the default paths of the DVS software e g the System base video directory see Fuze Configu rations user guide A click on the button SEARCH MATERIAL opens the following window Changing theses paths will alter the DVS software s default settings not only for this project but for the DVS software in general If not set back to the original default paths following your work on this project it will have implications on previ ously created as well as future projects For more details about the individual paths and their meaning see the Fuze Configurations user guide Set directories m base video directory ta Temporary operator data Cancel Figure 8 9 Setting system wide directories Either type in the appropriate paths or use the buttons to the right E to select them After confirming your alterations with the button OK the DVS software will change its default paths and search for the clips at the new locations If found they will be immediately available in your project PVs The Menus 8 5 The Options Menu The Options menu provides menu options to set up and configure the DVS system and its software In detail it contains the menu options shown below X Driver connect
281. s To the right of the SETTINGS button you can find the thumbnails combo box When you click on the arrow to the right of the combo box with the mouse you will receive a drop down list Atstawend Internal f No thumbnails At startend Continuously File names Figure 6 6 List of thumbnails combo box From this list you can select the view of the video track s i e you can select the way the clips representations are displayed in the video track s For example the clips can be shown with continuous thumb nails in the video track s HOLLYWOOD HOLLYWOOD Figure 6 7 Continuous thumbnails 6 7 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs In detail the clips in the video track s can be set to the following ap pearances Selection Meaning No thumbnails The clips representations in the video track s of the timeline are shown without thumbnails At start end Thumbnails of the clips are displayed at the start and the end of the clips only e g as shown in figure 6 51 on page 6 54 Continuously All clips in the video track s are filled with thumbnails continuously as shown in the ex ample figure above File names Instead of seeing the thumbnails continuously the clips are filled with their file names instead i e you will see the original file names of the re spective image files throughout the clip which may be especially helpful during frame accu rate
282. s or via the usual keyboard short cuts see section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 6 Clips within the bin can also be copied or pasted between folders via a drag and drop procedure see section Sorting Clips into Folders on page 4 19 Sorting Clips When the text information view is selected for the clips in the contents area of the bin see section Changing the View of Clips on page 4 5 you can sort the clips easily e In the text information table simply click on the respective column heading to sort the entries under this column in ascending or descending order Then the clips will be sorted accordingly and the type of order will be indicated by the triangle to the right of the column heading The sorting will also be available after switching to the thumbnail view of the bin again The already sorted clips can even be sorted further i e they can be sort ed by up to three criteria in total With this you are able for instance to sort clips by their names as well as by their duration e To sort the list further hold the Ctrl key pressed while clicking with the mouse on another column heading Whether this sorting occurs in ascending or descending order is deter mined by the sorting order of the very first column heading i e if the first selected column is sorted in descending order all following sorting criteria will also be sorted in descending order By repeating the last step you can sort the list
283. s of the number of timeline el ements in the attachment all will be disconnected Disconnect Disconnects and severs the attachments of all at timeline tached timeline elements in the timeline in one step After that the attached clip s will be severed and disconnected In case the timeline does not contain other attachments the button for the in sert mode will be available and ready for a selection again 6 4 13 Time Stretching or Time Compression of Clips Video and audio clips added to the timeline can be time stretched or time compressed in real time with common interpolations frame field repetition or skipping of frames fields Time stretching or time com pression allows you to speed up or slow down the play out of a clip for instance for slow fast motion purposes or to match your project s pace For this the respective timeline element can be automatically resized in the timeline left in its original size set via the clip s in and outpoint or adjusted to the desired length manually in the timeline e When changing the timing of audio clips no pitch control is i provided Thus it should be used for slight timing changes only S For frequency changes of the timeline e g when playing out or finalizing with a different video raster an automatic retiming of audio can be configured see figure in section How to Con figure the Video Output on page 6 11 and section Config uring Audio on pag
284. s to specify the timecodes as they will occur in the EDL For this use the settings items as described below Timecode This combo box determines the type of timecode that should be used for the creation of the data list You can set that the file numbers of the file names on the storage should be translated to timecode and set as the source in and outpoints of the data list Internal or that the source timecodes provided by the headers of the files should be used Source TC In case the clips in the timeline are configured to show a virtual source timecode this timecode will be taken when Source TC is selected Source Offset With this entry field you can define an offset for the clips in and outpoints the in and outpoints within their respective source material i e you can adjust and relocate their trim points Enter the respective offset in timecode format Destination Offset With this entry field you can set an offset for the clips destinations within the created timeline of the data list If the timeline of the Edit Tool is set to a timeline offset already it will be detailed in this field Enter the respective offset in timecode format Detailing Additional Options The area Options provides additional items to determine the creation of the data list Use them as indicated below whenever the list to be cre ated should provide these features Add reel re placement list This che
285. s well They are applied top to bottom i e the effect at the top of the list will be applied first to the clip followed successively by the rest of the added effects This may be especially important when applying the same effect type several times You can change the se quence of the effects in the effects list easily via drag and drop Simply select one effect and drag it to the desired position within the list An effect can be deleted from the effects list of a clip the same way you delete a clip from the timeline Just select the effect from the effects list in the timeline element properties and press the key Del on your key board or select from its context menu the menu option Delete To apply the same effect settings to other clips in the timeline you can either use the general items to the left of the timeline element proper ties area see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 or use preset effects as described in section Effects on Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs page 4 22 and section Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area on page 7 14 When transferring settings to other clips in the timeline e g via the modify buttons only the settings of the currently se lected operator are copied In case you want to apply the set tings of another operator to clips in the timeline you have to select it in the effects list and perform the same procedure again 7 6 3 Using Pres
286. s will start the defragmentation of the storage During the defragmentation process the command line window will display the various checkings and phases of the defragmentation Once finished with all phases it will start again after a certain interval Whether a defragmentation has to be performed is indicated by a spe cial assessment that evaluates the fragmentation degree of the clips on the storage Once a defragmentation is indicated it will start by defrag menting the worst fragmented files first and align them on the storage so that they are optimized for real time tasks such as a play out or a re cord In its next cycle it will take other not so worse fragmented files and so on until all data is defragmented sufficiently Afterwards in each cycle only the checking is performed until a fragmentation is detected once more ther close the command line window or press the key combi i To terminate the manually started defragmentation process ei nation Ctrl C A 7 2 Cleaning Temporary Data Manually A 22 When working with the Edit Tool temporary data may be created to ensure a real time capable environment Temporary data can be pre rendered files usually written to a location on your main storage espe cially reserved for this kind of data In case you are not sure whether the temporary data in this directory is necessary you can delete its Appendix whole contents manually Afterwards you may load your pro
287. scsceseeee 2 11 modules E E E EE 2 7 of proxy data wees 2 11 Moir eeen 7 19 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide monitoring SUI iriiri as actos seen 6 16 performance nosses 4 32 MONO iirinn ninasi 6 14 6 63 moving clips axiaeiatrteccsccenacse 6 34 multi clip scesseacGtualvasasasectecets 4 11 A 3 audio oeoc 4 8 4 12 6 70 properties n n 4 12 4 21 Sequencelnfo xml 4 12 6 79 multiple channels audio 4 11 6 4 6 62 6 76 multi threaded I O mode 4 33 4 34 4 42 muting tracks ceee 6 32 N name Of liD yrat 4 21 6 55 6 63 of tracks eere 6 24 name options finalizing 6 79 new DiN Reeser eee eee cen 8 15 folder ecvvvichs wives niani 4 8 4 15 Proje Secasaentainetcsssersasenetomateens 8 3 next cutting point icc cateicteectsnesraese 5 12 No thumbnails c 6 8 NOLES ecco z scence eee eee 1 7 project management 2 11 number of tracks 6 6 6 57 6 64 O offset export EDL ns tasuctsnearenerneatetsoke 8 9 frame number finalizing 6 82 source timecode ece 2 13 timecode frames finalizing 6 73 timeline snseacee acessendisentenadazeinieks 6 8 open DIN Peers a cetacean 8 14 project scsesieessacieeces react cspeacents 8 4 open platform ssec 8 17 Operator ccecce 4 22 7 1 A 3 embedded siriagiorrseisa A 2 making settings cc 7 12 prerendering n 2 11 6 41 temporary data prerender 2 9 6 42 TANSILIONS coisinn 6 40 optional features 4 2
288. selected as well and they can then for ex ample be moved easily together while their alignment and relative po sition to each other is maintained However because attached clips can only be used in the overwrite mode of the Edit Tool once clips are attached in the timeline the soft ware switches on the overwrite mode automatically When working with attached clips in the timeline you cannot switch to the insert mode anymore The button to switch be tween the two different modes appears dimmed and is no lon ger available Further information about the insert and overwrite mode can be found in section Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 30 To activate the insert mode all timeline elements have to be dis connected How to Disconnect Attached Clips To sever an attachment of clips or to switch back to the insert mode of the Edit Tool you have to disconnect the attached clips e Select the attached clips or a specific clip of the attachment and call up its context menu PVs The Timeline e Then use either one of the following menu options Disconnect Disconnects and severs only the selected clip from element the attachment If the attachment comprises sev eral clips i e one video clip and several audio clips the rest of the attachment will be main tained Disconnect Disconnects and severs the attachment of all ele group ments in the group where the context menu was invoked Regardles
289. ser Guide PVs 6 26 Figure 6 27 Timeline sliders With the left slider you can zoom in or out of the timeline keyboard shortcuts Up Arrow and Down Arrow If the slider is set to the left most point you are able to see the whole contents of the timeline When it is set more to the right you will zoom into the timeline When you have zoomed into the timeline you can change the viewing position of the timeline with the right slider You can go to the end of the timeline by pulling this slider to the right and to the beginning of the timeline by pulling it to the left Via the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configurations user i guide you can set the way the Edit Tool performs a zooming on the timeline There you can set whether the zooming should occur on the position of the timeline cursor or on the current viewing position of the timeline The cursor of the timeline provides a special feature when zoomed far into the timeline Then it provides a frame end marker which indicates where this particular image ends in the timeline HOLLY WOO p OLLY WOO p HOLLY WOO p line of timeline cursor frame end marker Figure 6 28 Timeline cursor when zoomed into the timeline As you can see in the figure above the frame selected with the cursor is the 8th frame of the 12th second and it ends where the 9th frame starts The frame end marker is very useful when you want to perform frame accurate cuts or other edit wo
290. sier taati 6 21 Delete 05 6 19 6 28 7 29 DVSINTO sereine 4 37 Edit ate easiest estes sitet aiaa 2 7 Fields cities cazsesestreteceateace 5 11 5 15 Frame In Out nasses 7 24 frame field backward 5 11 5 15 7 27 frame field forward 5 11 5 15 7 27 Frames cecceceeeeeeeeeees 5 11 5 15 Graph ZOOM aces ccncoctateayiietteness 7 24 1 Od scene E net aucdietiocadtiansaemeiite 2 7 MAZE oases sence ene seen 4 6 TAEDE 6 28 IDOI cocisniieina iaiia 6 29 INSENT svosscndaiecscacecssseietes 5 12 6 30 PVs Index Wi TOLOS siirrot estate cece 6 19 COMOMS settee decesteosesatieict acess 6 42 Mark All anne eee ener ere rn are 4 39 COMSISLENCY oases 6 57 8 15 Modify after n 7 4 COPYING oee 4 18 4 20 6 37 Modify all seee 7 4 CrOp CONTENTS ccactetetectoidesiactoas 6 20 Modify before eec 7 3 cutting a clip ceccccccecree 6 39 Monitoring ccccccccccecn 6 17 delete effect acen 7 14 Name options in tesecedeteradiincseeets 6 79 delete from bin eeen 4 21 next cutting point 3 13 5 12 delete from timeline 3 10 6 38 of timeline tracks 3 10 6 13 6 32 6 55 6 63 MOOS ateraia ning 6 72 duration aeee 6 55 6 63 7 3 OUI DOING cccccctiee tcc ressexeisversast 6 29 file name display 000 6 8 OVEN orisati rnaen 5 12 6 30 frame missing 4 35 6 57 8 15 DIAM actceceeemeteeee 5 12 5 15 inpoint information 6 54 6 62 previous cutting point 3 13 5 12 WWI ianen 4 11 Reset ccc
291. size Aspect ratio 777 Data rate Framerate Duration Name tie File format wae Resolution 80 pixe File path lt w Color depth its File name 4 4 4 Frame siz Aspect ratio Data rate Framerate 29 97 p Duration Figure 4 9 Clip marked in the bin In the figure above the top clip is stored on a system drive Because this location is not real time capable it may not provide enough data trans 4 13 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs fer rate to make the vast amount of data accessible in time a warning icon is visible at the top left side of the thumbnail and the respective val ue of the text information that is the cause for this warning is marked in yellow The location of the real time capable storage is a configurable setting in the Configuration Tool of the DVS software System base video di rectory see Fuze Configurations user guide This setting is also used during the exchange of project files between different DVS sys tems The System base video directory should always be config ured to the native main storage stripe set of the DVS system see Fuze Configurations user guide Other storage loca tions may be too slow for real time operations Via the setting Additional real time paths of the Configura tion Tool you can also configure other storage locations as real time storages 4 2 4 Working with Folders in the Bin The folder area of the bin is used to create folders to sort a
292. spective controls EEEE EE of the control area see section Controls on page 5 11 The appearance of timeline markers can be configured to your i liking with the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide A list of all markers positioned in the timeline is available via the tab Markers of the tool area see section The Marker Table on page 4 30 This section explains how to set and use markers Marker Types Currently there is only one type of marker available for the timeline Timeline Marker The default marker type for the timeline Markers of the type Timeline Marker can also be used to i show where drops occurred during a real time operation If this happens they can be easily placed via the performance monitor of the DVS software Afterwards they will be indicating the po sition of the drops that occurred see section The Performance Monitor on page 4 32 6 47 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs How to Set Timeline Markers Manually Markers of the type Timeline Marker can be manually placed in the timeline of the Edit Tool For this perform the following e Move the timeline cursor to the position where the marker should be set e After this select the button MARK available in the user interface of the Edit Tool Alternatively you can also use the menu option Add Mark er on the context menu of the timeline scale This will add a marker
293. step you have to observe the insert overwrite mode In the insert mode the contents of the timeline as it is will be preserved and moved backwards in the timeline while in the overwrite mode it will be overwritten see also section Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 30 e Add the clip to the timeline as described in section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 and drag it to the set inpoint of the time line With the snapping mode active the clip will adjust itself automatically at the inpoint of the timeline when the mouse cursor is in close proxim ity to it After releasing the mouse button the clip will be added to the timeline at the exact position Furthermore if its length exceeds the length of the marked part of the timeline via in and outpoint it will be trimmed to the exact length determined by the outpoint of the timeline automatically The length of a timeline element i e its outpoint can also be i adjusted frame accurately with its timeline element properties see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 6 4 5 Deleting Timeline Elements in a Specified Range 6 38 You can delete all timeline elements in a specified range of the timeline easily To determine the range and part of the timeline where the dele tion should occur you have to use the timeline s in and outpoint Af terwards all timeline elements between the in and outpoint of the timelin
294. storage etc Those elements that exceed the real time capability of the DVS system will be subject to a prerendering Fact is the greater the resolution of the material in the timeline and or the video raster set for an output the more likely the chance that a pre rendering is required Then the system will not be able to handle the re spective clip or operator in real time A prerendering may be indicated for all types of timeline ele i ments i e clips as well as operators e g transitions If any ex ceed the real time capability of the DVS system they will be marked for a prerendering Further information about the real time capability of clips can be found in section Real time Ca pability of Clips on page 4 13 A prerendering of timeline elements means that the Edit Tool calculates the elements before a play out takes place and stores the calculated ex 6 41 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 42 tra files rendered images in a temporary location on the storage These are then used for a play out instead of the original material in the timeline It is best to handle and administer the temporary data project i specific meaning for each project in a different temporary stor age location Further information about this can be found in section Notes on Project Management on page 2 11 A part of the timeline that has to be prerendered before a play out will be displayed with a yellow line in th
295. t On the left hand side you can find a list of the effect s settings that can be used for a keyframing On the right hand side the graph of the keyframe editor is displayed where a keyframing can be configured 7 8 1 The Parameters List To the left of the keyframe editor you can find the Parameters list It lists all settings of the effect that can be used for a keyframing 7 21 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 22 Parameters Zoomx PanX x x x x x x Rotation Figure 7 15 Parameters list For each effect setting in the list there is one keyframing line available in the graph of the keyframe editor In the default view of the keyframe editor they are color coded meaning each setting is displayed in a dif ferent color and you can easily identify the keyframing line belonging to a setting because they are drawn in the same color However due to the fact that most effect settings have default values of either one e g 1 000 or 50 their respective keyframing lines may overlap each other in the graph With the list of parameters you can select the setting that should be keyframed When selecting a set ting from the list you can click on the stack of keyframing lines in the graph and create a keyframe for this particular setting even if others are visible on top of it However this works only as long as there is no other keyframe available at this location In case you accidentally se lected another stack
296. t is recognized by the file size This is done with a table of predefined file sizes Component or der UYVY Bits are packed tightly from left to right for three component samples then two bits of padding zero to fill up to four bytes The lines are padded to a multiple of four bytes The file is padded to a multiple of 512 bytes yuvl6 16 bit YUV 4 2 2 Raw 16 bit YUV file format This file has no header The image format is recognized by the file size This is done with a table of pre defined file sizes Each component is stored as a 16 bit value in big endian byte order left aligned Component order UYVY PVs Appendix 1 DVS saves files of this format by default in big endian byte order However during loading both formats little and big endian byte order can be read 2 Regarding the file type V2 is the DPX file format according to SMPTE 268M 2003 the remaining V1 are SMPTE 268M 1994 b e stands for big endian l e for little endian 3 Cannot be captured 4 Not real time capable Available for loading only 5 8 bit YUV 4 2 2 and YUVA 4 2 2 4 8 bit per component 16 bit average per pixel 6 16 bit YUV 4 2 2 16 bit per component 32 bit average per pixel Container File Formats The DVS software supports the following container file formats for au dio and or video material Format Default File storage Descrinti escription Name Extension f
297. t effect RS 422 scrub bar to scrub source timecode tail timeline cursor timeline element transition End of a clip For video material either the last file on the storage or a last frame virtually set trimmed in the DVS software For audio mate rial either the last sample of a file or a virtually set trimmed outpoint in the DVS software The end of a timeline It is either a user defined outpoint or the last frame sample of the timeli ne s content Timeline mode during your work with timeline elements When deleting or moving clips in the timeline gaps may appear and by adding or moving timeline elements the contents of the timeline may be overwritten The calculation and rendering of timeline ele ments prior to a play out because they exceed the real time capability of the DVS system User defined settings of an effects operator They are available as subeffects under the re spective effects operator in the tool area With them you can apply the same settings of an ef fect over and over again in the timeline Interface for serial data communication See also 9 pin protocol and Odetics protocol A representation of a timeline in software It provides a slider or cursor that you can use to move through the data of the material To shuttle or perform a search run Timecode information stored in the header of a file e g in dpx image files You can use the source timecodes for example in the
298. t not be present in the timeline of the Edit Tool With the display type set to File number the in and out point information of the clips will provide the in and outpoint with regard to the single audio file only in milliseconds i e untrimmed each audio clip in the timeline will begin with zero and end with its total duration see also section Changing the Display Type on page 6 9 i The audio mode of the clip can be changed in its clip properties s You can receive additional information about the clips via their tooltips which can be customized to your needs see section Configuring the Tooltips of Clips on page 6 9 for further in formation 6 6 2 The Context Menu of Audio Clips The context menu of audio clips usually invoked with a right click of the mouse provides the following menu options and functions that can be used with audio clips Remove control With this menu option you can delete a volume point control point that was set on the volume control line see section Volume Control on page 6 65 Delete This menu option deletes the respective clip where the context menu was invoked from the timeline Alternatively you can select the clip and press the Del key on your keyboard 6 63 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 64 Attach Disconnect ele ment Disconnect group Disconnect timeline These menu options enable you to work with
299. table controls you can either save the results shown in the drop table to a file or set markers in the timeline of the Edit Tool where the respective drop took place They are in detail explained in section The Table Controls on page 4 39 If the chart controls the drop table as well as the table controls are dimmed the performance monitor is turned off Then in the status bar the message Performance Monitor disabled will be displayed To mea sure the workload of the system with the performance monitor it has to be enabled via the Configuration Tool of the DVS software see Fuze Configurations user guide for more information e The DVS software is able to process several different image i files simultaneously multi threaded I O mode Therefore x one bar drawn in the chart may represent several file accesses Although the multi threaded I O mode is the recommended mode for the DVS software it can be set to a single threaded I O mode via a setting available in the Configuration Tool see Fuze Configurations user guide As soon as the software is started the performance monitor will write by default a drop report into the subdirectory drop_reports under the directory log in the application data path of the current user APPDATA DVS Clipster for the actual location type in at a command line echo APPDATAS then press Enter There will be one report written per session However it will inform you ab
300. the digital audio outputs of the DVS system you have to con figure the audio output accordingly set to your liking see section Video and Audio Track Proper ii The number of audio tracks displayed in the Edit Tool can be ties on page 6 6 In the areas preceding the audio tracks you can find the audio routing button R Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 14 audio routing button for 2nd audio track Figure 6 12 Button to configure the audio output settings With these buttons you can set for each track separately the audio out put After pressing one of the R buttons the following window will be displayed Track 2 properties Audio Mode Slip Syne ms Samples Fra Timecode zaj Copy to all tracks Output P athis Figure 6 13 Window to configure the audio output settings In the area Audio Mode select whether the audio mode of the track should be mono or stereo The Edit Tool applies the selected audio mode directly to the respective audio track and it will be down or up mixed before it reaches any output While the smallest unit of a video clip is a single frame field the small est unit of an audio clip is a sample The DVS system provides up to 48 000 samples per second of audio 48 kHz opposed to the respec tive video frequency setting frames per second for the video output With the area Slip Sync you can bring your video and audio output into synchronization by adjusting t
301. the state of the timeline The following fea tures are provided by the scrub bar Items of Scrub Bar Description in dark grey Parts of the scrub bar displayed in dark grey in dicate parts of the timeline that are not visible in the timeline area at the moment You can change the size of this part by zooming in or out of the timeline see section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 25 in light grey Parts in light grey show the part of the timeline that is currently visible in the timeline area You can change the size of this part by zooming in or out of the timeline Furthermore by moving within the timeline you can change its position see also section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 25 the mouse and moved along the scrub 2 bar to switch the view of the video and audio tracks in the timeline area to an other part of the timeline i This part can be selected directly with amp 5 9 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs Items of Scrub Bar Description The blue line indicates the part of the timeline selected via the timeline s in and outpoint For information on how to set the in and outpoint of the timeline see section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 28 With the scrub bar cursor you can move within your project Simply select the cursor with the mouse and move it along the scrub bar to the desired position
302. the timeline without a pre rendering indication reduce the value that indicates when a timeline element has to be prerendered see Configura tion Tool in the Fuze Configurations user guide Then prerender the tran sitions see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 41 After this the problem should be re solved 4 43 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs pable Marker Timeline rk Probable Cause Solution Position Element Throughout the The storage location s Move the material to a real time capa timeline is are not real time ca ble storage The storage location s where the material is stored is are too full It is recommended to use only 85 of the overall storage capacity If the storage s is are too full delete some of the data Configurations of the system have been al tered so that it is no longer capable of real time operations Contact the DVS service department One or more hard disks of the storage array may be damaged Replace the defective disk s as de scribed in the hardware guide of the DVS system 4 44 iJ hardware guide After applying the recommended solution the problem should be re solved However if the drops persist please contact the DVS service department If drops occur during a record operation with the DVS system one or more hard disks of the storage array may be damaged In th
303. this list box one entry for instance to change its settings to delete it or to enable it Once a valid 3D LUT file is selected and a profile name is specified you can add it to the list box above with the button ADD Because one 3D LUT file can be applied to one profile only with this button you can also change the name of an already created profile or assign another file to it With the button DELETE you can delete an al ready specified 3D LUT file profile from the list box Simply select an entry from the list box and press this button to delete it Logarithmic 3D LUTs often expect logarithmic material in the timeline color values for each image are stored logarithmically With this but ton it is possible to virtually convert linear mate rial in the timeline to a logarithmic color space before the 3D LUT is applied In the entry field Custom Name you can state the name of a 3D LUT profile Either enter a new name or select an already created profile in the list box and change its name In this entry field you have to enter the directory path and file name of the 3D LUT file You may also click on the button to the right of the entry field E to select the file directly via the opening dialog window When a profile is selected from the list box its 3D LUT file will be displayed in the preview area to the right in a color cube Then you can view itin more detail by performing one of the fol lowing on the color cube
304. thumbnail The thumbnail view can be configured via the Configuration Tool group Markers see Fuze Configurations user guide When selecting an entry from the list with a double click of the mouse the timeline cursor will jump to the respective timeline marker on the timeline The entries in the table can be sorted in descending or ascending order same way as the bin when in the text information view For further in formation about this see section Sorting Clips on page 4 19 i Some columns such as Thumbnail cannot be used for a sort ing 4 31 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 6 The Performance Monitor 4 32 With the performance monitor of the DVS software you can monitor the workload of the DVS system during a real time operation Thus you can verify for example the status of the hard disks of the storage as well as of certain files After starting the DVS software and thus the Edit Tool the bin is by de fault activated in the tool area As soon as you select the tab Perform in the tool area the area will look similar to the following figure Bin Effects Jobs Markers Perform chart __ Update lS 7 chart controls e De Sintfo Reset status bar e Wieiethicoscnetiiea cir Rien en A nT Date Time Type Timeline TC Frame File drop table e table controls t e vs Mark All Clear Figure 4 20 The performance mon
305. timeline of the Edit Tool instead of the internal relative timecode provided by the timeline If a clip does not contain source timecode information it can be virtually provided with one Material at the end of a clip that is available but neither used nor visible in a timeline of the DVS software due to an outpoint adjustment trim ming See also head Position indicator of the timeline Video and audio clips or operators that are visi ble in the tracks of the timeline A transition effect between two video clips Appendix vertical editing video clip VTR VTR timeline To add timeline elements to other video tracks in the timeline than the first one When different timeline elements occupy the same space at the same time in the timeline the contents of a play out can be easily changed at that particular position Usually a folder directory of the file system that contains frames image files Video tape recorder A device to record image and sound data magnetically on tapes Timeline of the VTR task mode that provides a length of 24 hours Video and audio material can be stored anywhere on the timeline See the Fuze I O Tool user guide Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 2 Keyboard Shortcuts A 6 For a more easy and a faster control of the Edit Tool there are various keyboard shortcuts available which are listed in the table below Action Shortcut Play speed 1 Spac
306. timeline in and outpoint at the cut T ting points of the current clip Delete timeline inpoint D Delete timeline outpoint F Delete timeline in and outpoint G Go to timeline inpoint Q Go to timeline outpoint W Add timeline marker Shift N Zoom into timeline Up Arrow Zoom out of timeline Down Arrow Mute on off video track 1 8 Mute on off video track 2 7 Mute on off audio track 1 9 Mute on off audio track 2 Mute on off audio track 3 0 L Mute on off audio track 4 Additionally the following keyboard actions and shortcuts may be helpful Action Key Action Enter double zero 00 in timecode fields numeric keypad Deactivate snapping mode Hold Shift key while working in the timeline with the mouse Slave mode on off Alt S Select several clips and or transi tions disjointedly Hold Ctrl key while selecting clips transitions with the mouse Select a range of adjoining clips and or transitions Hold Shift key while selecting clips transitions with the mouse Select all elements in the area that has the focus Ctrl A Copy bin clip to a folder of the bin instead of moving Hold Ctrl key while drag and drop of clip with mouse Copy selected elements to the clip board Ctrl C Fuze Edit Tool User Guide A 8 Action Key
307. tion Undo allows to undo your latest timeline related ac tion When this option is selected the timeline will be restored to the state before your last timeline operation 8 3 2 Redo The Redo menu option will reverse the action performed via the Undo menu option see section Undo on page 8 13 To redo an action se lect this menu option Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 4 The Bin Menu The menu Bin provides several functions to facilitate your work with the bin In detail it contains the menu options shown below Bin Import Bin Ctrl Shitt l Export Bin Ctri Shift E Clear Bin Check Bin Ctrl Shift K Figure 8 7 The Bin menu They will be described in detail in the following sections 8 4 1 Import Bin With the menu option Import Bin you can import the bin of another project into your currently active project The selection of this menu op tion opens a standard dialog window for a file selection To import a bin you can select a either a normal project file of the DVS software or a bin file which can be created via the menu option Export Bin see section Export Bin on page 8 15 File extensions cp Project file cb Bin file cp autosave Automatically saved intermedi ate situation backup cp Backup file of old project file When loaded the selected bin with folders and clips will be imported into your currently active project The imported bin will be checked for in
308. tionally it provides important notes that you should read Chapter 2 Contains basic information about the Edit Tool Here you can find information about the soft ware structure as well as a first overview of the user interface of the Edit Tool Furthermore this chapter provides some general notes for example about how to manage projects with the DVS software Chapter 3 In addition to the information how to start and exit the program you can find a beginner s tu torial which explains shortly how to work with the Edit Tool and how to start your first project in this chapter Chapter 4 Explains the tool area of the Edit Tool Chapter 5 This chapter describes the control area and the video overlay of the Edit Tool Chapter 6 In this chapter the timeline of the Edit Tool and timeline related tasks are described Chapter 7 This chapter explains and describes the timeline element properties of video clips and transi tions Individual effects that a video clip may provide are explained as well Chapter 8 Provides information about the individual menu options of the menu bar of the Edit Tool Appendix Gives additional information about the soft ware Among others you can find here a glos sary of terms used in this user guide and the file formats that are supported by the DVS soft ware Index This chapter facilitates the search for specific terms 1 3 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PV
309. to determine the appearance of the respective element in the timeline further While with the properties of a transition you can for example set the type of wipe used for the transition with the ones for a video clip you can add effects operators to the clip The effects operators of video clips provide you with additional editing features for your video processing tasks However they may be part of optional packages This chapter describes the timeline element properties in detail First it will be explained how to access the properties followed by an explana tion of the items that are available in the properties area for all timeline elements After that it is described how to close the area of the timeline element properties to return to the view of the audio tracks again The chapter will be concluded with a description of the timeline element properties for each timeline element in detail Following the section dealing with the properties of video clips you can find each in a section of its own the explanation of all available effects operators 7 1 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 1 Accessing the Timeline Element Properties The properties of timeline elements can be accessed easily in the Edit Tool They will be shown instead of the visible audio tracks right below the timeline area in an area of their own To make this area visible per form the following e Double click the respective timeline element in the timeli
310. to the overwrite mode gaps may occur in the timeline More information on this can be found in section In sert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 30 The in or outpoint handler will react to certain elements of the timeline snapping mode to allow for an automated position ing You can deactivate the snapping mode and activate a fine tuning mode by pressing the Shift key Further information about the snapping mode can be found in section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 34 PVs The Timeline During the positioning of the in or outpoint handler of clips you can see a representation of the length of the clip in its timeline track The blue line right above the clip shows its original length Figure 6 41 Display of original length of clip With this you can easily determine whether and how much head or tail is available to for example create a transition 6 4 10 Advanced Trimming The advanced trimming features of the Edit Tool work the same way as the changing of in and outpoints of elements already added to the timeline see section Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Ele ments on page 6 43 They are available when you select two or more in or outpoint handlers of timeline elements present in the timeline This procedure can be used for all timeline elements i e video clips audio clips and embedded operators e g transitions For further more general information about tri
311. ts pane can be applied to clips in the timeline easily You simply have to add them to the effects list of the respective clip which is a part of its timeline element proper ties Information about how to add a clip to the timeline can be i found in section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 You can call up the properties of a timeline element with a dou ble click of the mouse on the respective element in the timeli ne Further information about this can be found in section Accessing the Timeline Element Properties on page 7 2 PVs The Tool Area Once at least one video clip is available in the timeline it can receive an effect from the effects pane of the tool area This is in detail described in section Adding Effects on page 7 10 4 3 2 Creating Preset Effects To apply the same effect settings of one clip to another the adjusted ef fect s settings in the timeline element properties can be created as an independent effect easily For this perform the following in advance e If not already available in the timeline element properties apply the respective effect to a clip in the timeline as described in section Adding Effects on page 7 10 e Adjust the settings of this effect according to your needs in the set tings pane of the timeline element properties All changes to the effects operator are immediately applied to the se lected clip in the timeline Further information about the setti
312. ttaching Audio Clips to Video Clips on page 6 49 Example With the insert mode activated add a clip from the bin to the timeline or move a clip to the middle of an intact clip insertion point The result will be that clip no 1 gets divided at the insertion point The added clip no 2 will be placed here while the rest of clip no 1 moves to the end of clip no 2 The gist of the insert mode is that the contents of the timeline will be preserved at all times and that no clips will be deleted Furthermore during your editing work the clips will always stay in connection with previous or following clips so that no gaps will occur in the timeline Overwrite Mode In the overwrite mode a moved or added clip replaces the vid JIN eo material behind the insertion point 6 31 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs In the overwrite mode you can set a transition between two neighbor ing clips at all times If needed the Edit Tool will create the necessary head and tail automatically This means that parts of the clips may be moved to enable the transition which in turn may cause gaps in the timeline For more information about transitions see section Setting Transitions on page 6 40 Example With the overwrite mode activated add a clip from the bin to the time line or move a clip to the middle of an intact clip insertion point The result will be that clip no 1 gets divided at the inse
313. ubdirectories can be found in section Finalizing the Timeline on page 6 68 When adding a main directory with one or more i audio clips in subdirectories to the bin it is checked whether they are multi clips If regis tered as such a thumbnail for each multi clip will be added to the contents area of the bin as described above In addition one or more sub folders will be created in the bin which will con tain the individual clips used for the audio multi clips This behavior is useful because contrary to video multi clips you cannot change the properties of an audio multi clip via the context menu If you want to change the properties of an audio multi clip you have to change them for each clip individually in its respective bin subfolder see section Changing the Properties of Clips on page 4 21 Clips of either audio or video that were not completely recorded receive this icon Then you will know that parts of this clip may be missing However you can already use them in the timeline of the Edit Tool and work with them Files of an unknown type i e files where the DVS software is not able to determine whether they are audio or video files will get this icon They can not be used in the DVS software The Tool Area Real time Capability of Clips With an optimized system and a main storage that incorporates fully functioning hard disks the DVS system can handle two data streams of film materi
314. udio tracks of the time line you can cut the clip at a desired position For this perform the fol lowing e Move the timeline cursor to the desired position in the timeline as described in section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 25 When zoomed far into the timeline the timeline cursor pro vides a frame end marker that indicates where the selected frame ends in the timeline see also section Moving via the Timeline Scale on page 6 25 This may help you during the positioning of the timeline cursor e Then press the button EDIT This will cut the clip and set a cutting edit point at the selected position Then you can for example delete one of these clips select the clip and press the Del key on your keyboard move it to another position see section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 34 or alter its properties differently see chapter Timeline Element Properties on 6 39 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs page 7 1 When a track is locked see section Muting and Locking Tracks on page 6 32 its timeline element is not cut adjusted frame accurately with its timeline element properties see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 i The length of a timeline element i e its outpoint can also be 6 4 7 Setting Transitions 6 40 When at least two clips are present in a video track of the timeline you can set a transition between these tw
315. und of the system During stand still times of the system the defragmentation tool will reorganize the files present on the storage for an optimized performance of real time tasks such as a play out Among the tools it is the only process that runs in the system s back ground Most other tools delivered with the DVS software are used during the initial configuration and setup of the system only In your daily work with the DVS system they are of no use Further information about the tools in general can be found in i the Fuze Tools and Services user guide accessible via the PDF files of the software s online help For additional information about the defragmentation process in particular please refer to section The Automatic Defragmentation Process on page A 20 Basics 2 2 Overview of the User Interface The following figure shows the user interface of the Edit Tool as it ap pears after starting the DVS software for information on how to start the software see chapter Getting Started on page 3 1 menu bar tool area task bar iJ control area POSTE LT Le Le ee ee Ts Pave Mak Delete MW i FE Trans Inset timeline area Figure 2 2 User interface of the Edit Tool The DVS software is designed to run in full screen mode to provide for an undistracted view on the video material and the editing task at hand To switch to the operating system envi ronment use the Windows pl key on
316. ure 3 1 The bin activated in tool area The bin provides initial access to the video audio material stored on your system In the bin you can find two main areas In the folder area you can make folders and directories to sort your material into This way you can perform a clip and project management In the contents area you can preview the material sorted into a folder via thumbnails or text information The thumbnails also provide a scrub bar to set roughly the inpoint of the respective clip 3 3 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 3 4 You can configure the appearance of the bin freely It will be saved together with the project file iJ You can arrange the areas horizontally if you like select the respective appearance from the context menu of the bin s title bar Via the buttons in the button area you can set whether the clips shall be seen as thumbnails with text or with their text information only The kind of text information displayed in the bin can be set freely with the Configuration Tool button CONFIG or Options Configuration project Furthermore the right edge of the tool area can be moved for example to display the contents of the activated tool com pletely Then in case of the bin you will be able to view the thumbnails together with all text information available If you pull the right edge of the tool area completely to the left the tool area will no longer be visible if you
317. usual primary colors red green and blue while Mg stands for magenta Cy for cyan and YI for yellow secondary colors Vectorscope 75 The vectorscope 75 is the same as the vectorscope 100 see sec tion Vectorscope 100 on page 5 5 However to provide safe col ors for example for a legal broadcast signal this video scope already indicates the safety area of the colors The dotted line represents the full color values 100 whereas the squares show the colors with 75 of their values 5 5 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 6 Figure 5 7 The vectorscope 75 The colors of the output image should be located within the area en closed by the squares Any point beyond them will be located inside the headroom and it may not be possible to give it out correctly during a play out RGB Parade The RGB parade displays graphically the distribution of the color com ponents red green and blue RGB Each component is displayed sep arately For a parade the output image is evaluated line by line and for each line the color distribution is drawn Figure 5 8 The RGB parade White areas of an output image would appear as an accumulation of dots in all three color components near the 100 line minus head room if applicable Black image areas would be displayed as an accu mulation of dots in all three color components near the 0 line plus headroom if applicable When playing out in RGB this video sco
318. uze Configurations user guide for more information e Move the scrub bar cursor to the left or right to preview your mate rial and or to select an inpoint e preview Cas scrub bar Figure 4 14 Preview and setting of inpoint of the bin material While adding a clip to the bin you can already set the position li of the scrub bar cursor and thus define a possible inpoint for the clip During the adding see section Adding Clips to the Bin on page 4 6 select the particular frame file where the in point should be set and add it to the bin The scrub bar cursor of the thumbnail will be set accordingly e After that simply select the clip and drag it to a video or audio track of the timeline to start your editing work see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 The Edit Tool will use the selected inpoint as the starting point of your clip if this feature is enabled The Tool Area Changing the Properties of Clips In the bin you can call up the properties of clips Then you can for ex ample assign flags to clips or change their properties such as their names or video formats Use the opening window to change the clip s properties if the DVS software does not recognize its video or audio for mat correctly e Call up the context menu on a clip present in the contents area of the bin and select the menu option Properties This will open the Clip properties window whe
319. ve clip 6 65 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs If you want to create audio peaks or fade in or out audio you have to create more than one control point and set them accordingly There is no limit in the total number of control points and new ones can be cre ated as described above As an example the following figure shows an audio project with control points set to create fades Masterton es Figure 6 56 Fades achieved with the Fuze Edit Tool To control the setting of a control point the Edit Tool shows you its cur rent volume level in decibel via a tooltip Simply move the mouse cursor over a control point to view its setting Figure 6 57 Decibel setting of control point The decibel scale of the Edit Tool is as follows Decibel Indicator Loudness in 12 dB 25 6 dB 50 0 0 dB 100 6 dB 200 12 dB 400 While a totally decreased control point means that audio is muted a fully increased one does not necessarily mean that audio is set to 200 You can move a control point beyond the limits of the audio clip which will increase the volume over 200 This will be indicated by a shifted 100 level line it is then located in the lower half of the audio clip 6 6 4 Waveform Display With the button WAVE you can switch on or off the waveform display of the audio clips in the timeline You can find it at the 6 66 The Timeline bottom of the timeline area to t
320. xam ple with the menu option Prerender all see section Prerender all on page 8 11 Once the creation of the new temporary data is finished you can be sure that all files in the directory for the temporary data are valid ones After the creation of temporary data save your project file If an already saved project file is not saved after such a process again the temporary files will not be recognized by the DVS software when the project file is loaded once more Neither will they be used for a play out nor can they be deleted via the software In such a case they have to be deleted manually again A 23 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide A 24 Index Numerics IDLUT cerne 7 10 7 30 A 14 BLD a A 1 6 3D LUT ciriciri irys 6 17 A 15 color cube nsss 6 19 A 16 description n n A 15 enable eee envy ee eee 6 20 TUG seiseanan decececawmsaxeurseess 6 19 file syntax eocaneotectedcesetes A 16 A 18 finalizing o ae 6 73 logarithmic color space 6 19 profile wacristaseyeecioseeannes 6 18 visualization 22scaecatecaduveteazinedss 6 19 A about the software s e 8 21 7 2 action Safety areas eeen 5 2 add clip TO DiM sdacezdcicseecidiceice 3 4 4 6 8 5 to timeline nacen 3 7 6 2 to timeline certain length 6 37 add HACK cccvecececervasncasededexty 6 57 6 64 AIV eoar eri 6 12 6 16 ALE orenera aiie A 1 clipwise rendering cecce 6 71 alpha channel of video clip see 6 57 6 61 anal
321. y and draw a rectangle around them Timeline Element Properties Figure 7 25 Selecting several keyframes Once the mouse button is released the keyframes within the rectangle will be selected Then they can for example be positioned all at once by moving one of them with the mouse The selected keyframes can be deselected with the menu option Deselect Keyframes of the graph s context menu see figure 7 18 on page 7 25 Of course created keyframes can also be deleted For this you have various possibilities at hand You can select one or more keyframes in the graph and press Del on your keyboard or the button DELETE be low the graph or you can use the menu option Delete Keyframe of the context menu of the graph see figure 7 18 on page 7 25 Keyframes can also be deleted by resetting the keyframing line s see section The Parameters List on page 7 21 With the menu option Enable Tooltips of the context menu of the graph see figure 7 18 on page 7 25 you can turn on or off tooltips for the keyframing editor independent from the rest of the tooltips dis played in the Edit Tool 7 29 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 9 The Operator 1D LUT 7 30 With the operator 1D LUT you can assign a static look up table LUT to the currently selected clip to perform a color and or gamma correc tion iJ With this operator only one dimensional look up tables 1D LUT can be applied 3D LUTs can be loa
322. y on your main storage where to save the project file Beneath it create a subdirectory for the additional data V lt project specific directory gt lt proxy data directory gt lt project file gt cp This structure guarantees a clear and easy to manage project You can set the storage location of such data for the currently loaded project with the Configuration Tool of the DVS software in the group Project of the tab Project see Fuze Configurations user guide as well as section Working with Prerendered Data on page 2 9 for more information Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 2 6 Notes on Source Timecode and Keycode Some file formats for clips e g dpx files are capable of storing more information than just their image content These information are usu ally written in a specified format into the file headers which can be read and interpreted by different software applications that support these kind of information Among the information stored you can find for example the name of the creator usually the program that created the files the creation time and date the timecode and or the keycode Most of the data stored in file headers and transmitted to the DVS soft ware during a capturing will only be recorded and given back again during a play out if appropriate However DVS especially makes use of the timecode and keycode information The DVS software supports additional infor
323. your keyboard or se lect from the menu of the program icon on the menu bar the menu option Minimize see section Minimize on page 8 2 Via the check box Don t show this message again offered by information messages of the DVS software you can deacti vate the appearance of this particular message for the current software session i e next session it will be displayed again 2 5 Fuze Edit Tool User Guide PVs 2 6 After starting the DVS software the Edit Tool software module is acti vated automatically Here you can see the following items menu bar tool area control area timeline area task bar At the top of the user interface you can find a menu bar This menu bar provides access to functions and tasks of an administrative nature for the DVS software Here you can find for example import and export functions as well as several menu options generally concerned with projects and project files A description of the menu bar can be found in chapter The Menus on page 8 1 Directly below the menu bar you can find the tool area which may show you depending on the currently active software module and or on the optional features avail able various tools that can be used during your work with the system The tools are provided as tabs to switch easily between them By default you can find among the tools for example the bin which provides initial access to the video material For more details about the t
324. your work and you can immediately monitor your progress The video overlay will adapt its layout aspect ratio to the currently set video output raster of the timeline Due to the fact that the output ras ter may have an effect on the video material of the timeline you can use the video overlay to see its output effect immediately For example clips of different sizes in the video track s of the timeline may get cropped stretched or compressed or scaled according to your settings for the respective clips and your output settings All these effects can be viewed instantaneously via the video overlay Further information about how to set the video output raster can be found in section Con figuring the Video and Audio Output on page 6 11 This section describes the possibilities of the video overlay in detail 5 2 1 Configuring the Video Overlay 5 2 The video overlay can be configured to your liking You can adjust the safety areas as well as the size of the overlay The video overlay provides action safety and title safety areas that can be turned off or adjusted to your personal needs You can set the color as well as the sizes of these areas PVs The Control Area safety areas Figure 5 2 The video overlay This can be done with the Configuration Tool Please refer to the Fuze Configurations user guide for further information Furthermore you can adjust the size of the video overlay with the edg es of

Fuze Edit Tool User Guide (Version 3.7)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents